* configure.in: up the version number * src/DataViews/_FamilyList.py: add support for sidebar filter * src/DisplayModels/_BaseModel.py: handle generic model filtering * src/PageView.py: Add support for generic modeling * src/Filters/__init__.py: generic family rule support * src/Filters/_GenericFilter.py: generic family rule support * help/C/gramps-manual.xml: updates * help/Makefile.am: remove old files svn: r7013
		
			
				
	
	
		
			8669 lines
		
	
	
		
			336 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			XML
		
	
	
	
	
	
			
		
		
	
	
			8669 lines
		
	
	
		
			336 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			XML
		
	
	
	
	
	
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
 | 
						|
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
 | 
						|
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd">
 | 
						|
<!--
 | 
						|
	  User Manual for Gramps - a GTK+/GNOME based genealogy program
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
	  Copyright (C) 2003-2005  Alexander Roitman
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
	  This document is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 | 
						|
	  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
 | 
						|
	  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
 | 
						|
	  (at your option) any later version.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
	  This document is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
 | 
						|
	  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
 | 
						|
	  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
 | 
						|
	  GNU General Public License for more details.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
	  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 | 
						|
	  along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
 | 
						|
	  Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
 | 
						|
-->
 | 
						|
<book id="index" lang="en">
 | 
						|
  <!-- please do not change the id; for translations, change lang to -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <!-- appropriate code -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <bookinfo>
 | 
						|
    <title>GRAMPS Manual V2.8</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <copyright>
 | 
						|
      <year>2001</year>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <holder>Donald N. Allingham</holder>
 | 
						|
    </copyright>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <copyright>
 | 
						|
      <year>2003-2005</year>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <holder>Alex Roitman</holder>
 | 
						|
    </copyright>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- translators: uncomment this:
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <copyright>
 | 
						|
   <year>2002</year>
 | 
						|
   <holder>ME-THE-TRANSLATOR (Latin translation)</holder>
 | 
						|
  </copyright>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
-->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- 
 | 
						|
  An address can be added to the publisher information.  If a role is 
 | 
						|
  not specified, the publisher/author is the same for all versions of the 
 | 
						|
  document. 
 | 
						|
 -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <publisher>
 | 
						|
      <publishername>GRAMPS Project</publishername>
 | 
						|
    </publisher>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <legalnotice id="legalnotice">
 | 
						|
      <para>This manual is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
 | 
						|
      modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
 | 
						|
      by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at
 | 
						|
      your option) any later version.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
 | 
						|
      WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
 | 
						|
      MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General
 | 
						|
      Public License for more details.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 | 
						|
      along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
 | 
						|
      Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA</para>
 | 
						|
    </legalnotice>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- 
 | 
						|
   This file  contains link to license for the documentation (GNU GPL), and 
 | 
						|
   other legal stuff such as "NO WARRANTY" statement.  
 | 
						|
-->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <authorgroup>
 | 
						|
      <author>
 | 
						|
        <firstname>Alex</firstname>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <surname>Roitman</surname>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <affiliation>
 | 
						|
          <orgname>GRAMPS Project</orgname>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <address><email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></address>
 | 
						|
        </affiliation>
 | 
						|
      </author>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <author>
 | 
						|
        <firstname>Donald N.</firstname>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <surname>Allingham</surname>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <affiliation>
 | 
						|
          <orgname>GRAMPS Project</orgname>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <address><email>don@gramps-project.org</email></address>
 | 
						|
        </affiliation>
 | 
						|
      </author>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- This is appropriate place for other contributors: translators,
 | 
						|
     maintainers,  etc. Commented out by default.
 | 
						|
     
 | 
						|
      <othercredit role="translator">
 | 
						|
	<firstname>Latin</firstname> 
 | 
						|
	<surname>Translator 1</surname> 
 | 
						|
	<affiliation> 
 | 
						|
	  <orgname>Latin Translation Team</orgname> 
 | 
						|
	  <address> <email>translator@gnome.org</email> </address> 
 | 
						|
	</affiliation>
 | 
						|
	<contrib>Latin translation</contrib>
 | 
						|
      </othercredit>
 | 
						|
-->
 | 
						|
    </authorgroup>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- According to GNU GPL, revision history is mandatory if you are -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- modifying/reusing someone else's document.  If not, you can omit it. -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- Remember to remove the &manrevision; entity from the revision entries other
 | 
						|
-->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- than the current revision. -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- The revision numbering system for GNOME manuals is as follows: -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- * the revision number consists of two components -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- * the first component of the revision number reflects the release version of the GNOME desktop. -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- * the second component of the revision number is a decimal unit that is incremented with each revision of the manual. -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- For example, if the GNOME desktop release is V2.x, the first version of the manual that -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- is written in that desktop time frame is V2.0, the second version of the manual is V2.1, etc. -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- When the desktop release version changes to V3.x, the revision number of the manual changes -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- to V2.8, and so on. -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <revhistory>
 | 
						|
      <revision>
 | 
						|
        <revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.8</revnumber>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <date>July 2006</date>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <revdescription>
 | 
						|
          <para role="author">Alex Roitman
 | 
						|
          <email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
 | 
						|
        </revdescription>
 | 
						|
      </revision>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <revision>
 | 
						|
        <revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.5</revnumber>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <date>February 2004</date>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <revdescription>
 | 
						|
          <para role="author">Alex Roitman
 | 
						|
          <email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
 | 
						|
        </revdescription>
 | 
						|
      </revision>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <revision>
 | 
						|
        <revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.4</revnumber>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <date>December 2003</date>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <revdescription>
 | 
						|
          <para role="author">Alex Roitman
 | 
						|
          <email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
 | 
						|
        </revdescription>
 | 
						|
      </revision>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <revision>
 | 
						|
        <revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.3</revnumber>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <date>September 2003</date>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <revdescription>
 | 
						|
          <para role="author">Alex Roitman
 | 
						|
          <email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
 | 
						|
        </revdescription>
 | 
						|
      </revision>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <revision>
 | 
						|
        <revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.2</revnumber>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <date>July 2003</date>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <revdescription>
 | 
						|
          <para role="author">Alex Roitman
 | 
						|
          <email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para role="author">Donald A. Peterson
 | 
						|
          <email>dpeterson@sigmaxi.org</email></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
 | 
						|
        </revdescription>
 | 
						|
      </revision>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <revision>
 | 
						|
        <revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.1</revnumber>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <date>May 2003</date>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <revdescription>
 | 
						|
          <para role="author">Alex Roitman
 | 
						|
          <email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
 | 
						|
        </revdescription>
 | 
						|
      </revision>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <revision>
 | 
						|
        <revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.0</revnumber>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <date>April 2003</date>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <revdescription>
 | 
						|
          <para role="author">Alex Roitman
 | 
						|
          <email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
 | 
						|
        </revdescription>
 | 
						|
      </revision>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <revision>
 | 
						|
        <revnumber>GRAMPS User Manual V1.1</revnumber>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <date>2001</date>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <revdescription>
 | 
						|
          <para role="author">Donald N. Allingham
 | 
						|
          <email>don@gramps-project.org</email></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
 | 
						|
        </revdescription>
 | 
						|
      </revision>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <revision>
 | 
						|
        <revnumber>gramps User Manual V1.0</revnumber>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <date>2001</date>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <revdescription>
 | 
						|
          <para role="author">Donald N. Allingham
 | 
						|
          <email>don@gramps-project.org</email></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
 | 
						|
        </revdescription>
 | 
						|
      </revision>
 | 
						|
    </revhistory>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <releaseinfo>This manual describes version 2.2.0 of GRAMPS.</releaseinfo>
 | 
						|
  </bookinfo>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <preface id="gramps-preface">
 | 
						|
    <title>Preface</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>GRAMPS is a software package designed for genealogical research.
 | 
						|
    Although similar to other genealogical programs, GRAMPS offers some unique
 | 
						|
    and powerful features, which we'll discuss below.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>GRAMPS is an Open Source Software package, which means you are free
 | 
						|
    to make copies and distribute it to anyone you like. It's developed and
 | 
						|
    maintained by a worldwide team of volunteers whose goal is to make GRAMPS
 | 
						|
    powerful, yet easy to use.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="why-gramps">
 | 
						|
      <title>Why use GRAMPS?</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>Most genealogy programs allow you to enter information about your
 | 
						|
      ancestors and descendants. Typically, they can display family
 | 
						|
      relationships through charts, graphs, or reports. Some allow you to
 | 
						|
      include pictures or other media. Most let you include information about
 | 
						|
      people even if those people are not related to the primary family you
 | 
						|
      happen to be researching. And they may include features that let you
 | 
						|
      exchange data with other programs and print different types of
 | 
						|
      reports.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>GRAMPS has all these capabilities and more. Notably, it allows you
 | 
						|
      to integrate bits and pieces of data as they arise from your research
 | 
						|
      and to put them in one place -- your computer. You can then use your
 | 
						|
      computer to manipulate, correlate, and analyze your data, rather than
 | 
						|
      messing with reams of paper.</para>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="typography">
 | 
						|
      <title>Typographical conventions</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>In this book, some words are marked with special typography:
 | 
						|
      <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <simpara><application>Applications</application></simpara>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <simpara><command>Commands</command> you type at the command
 | 
						|
            line</simpara>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <simpara><filename>Filenames</filename></simpara>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <simpara><replaceable>Replaceable text</replaceable></simpara>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <simpara><guilabel>Labels</guilabel> for buttons and other
 | 
						|
            portions of the graphical interface</simpara>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <simpara>Menu selections look like this: <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                <guimenu>Menu</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <guisubmenu>Submenu</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <guimenuitem>Menu Item</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
              </menuchoice></simpara>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <simpara><guibutton>Buttons</guibutton> you can click</simpara>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <simpara><userinput>Anything you type in</userinput></simpara>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </itemizedlist></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>The manual also provides assorted bits of additional information
 | 
						|
      in tips and notes, as follows. <tip id="example-tip">
 | 
						|
          <title>Example Tip</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Tips and bits of extra information will look like this.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip> <note id="example-note">
 | 
						|
          <title>Example Note</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Notes will look like this.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>Finally, there are warnings, notifying you where you should be
 | 
						|
      careful: <warning id="example-warning">
 | 
						|
          <title>Example Warning</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>This is what a warning looks like. If there's a chance you'll
 | 
						|
          run into trouble, you will be warned beforehand.</para>
 | 
						|
        </warning></para>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
  </preface>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <chapter id="gramps-getting-started">
 | 
						|
    <title>Getting Started</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>In this chapter, we'll begin with the basics. We'll show you how to
 | 
						|
    start GRAMPS and how to get help when you need it.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="gramps-start">
 | 
						|
      <title>To Start GRAMPS</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>You can start GRAMPS in the following ways:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>From the <guimenu>Applications</guimenu> menu</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>Select GRAMPS from the list of programs displayed in your
 | 
						|
            computer's Applications menu. (The location and appearance of this
 | 
						|
            menu vary slightly from one distribution of Linux to another. On
 | 
						|
            the default GNOME desktop, you'll find GRAMPS in the <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                <guimenu>Applications</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <guisubmenu>Other</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
              </menuchoice> menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>From the command line</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>If you're adept with Linux and like to work from the command
 | 
						|
            line, you can start GRAMPS by calling up a terminal window, typing
 | 
						|
            <command>gramps</command>, and then pressing
 | 
						|
            <keycap>Enter</keycap>.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>If you would like GRAMPS to open a specific database or to
 | 
						|
            import a specific file on startup, you can supply the filename as
 | 
						|
            a command line argument:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para><filename>gramps filename.grdb</filename></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>where <filename>filename.grdb</filename> is the name of the
 | 
						|
            file you want to open. The command line provides many more ways to
 | 
						|
            start GRAMPS and perform different tasks.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="run-1st-time">
 | 
						|
      <title>Running GRAMPS for the first time</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>The first time you run the program, GRAMPS will display the
 | 
						|
      "Getting Started" dialogs. Follow the directions that guide you through
 | 
						|
      <guilabel>Researcher information</guilabel> and <guilabel>the LDS
 | 
						|
      extensions</guilabel> sections. You should find them to be
 | 
						|
      self-explanatory.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <note id="note-dialog">
 | 
						|
        <title>Dialog boxes</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>We'll make frequent reference in this manual to dialogs. A
 | 
						|
        dialog is simply a pop-up window into which you can enter
 | 
						|
        information.</para>
 | 
						|
      </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>We recommend you enter your personal information when GRAMPS
 | 
						|
      prompts you for it. GRAMPS uses this information strictly so it can
 | 
						|
      create valid GEDCOM output files (which require information about the
 | 
						|
      files' creator). If you wish, you can choose not to supply this
 | 
						|
      information, but be aware that unless and until you do, any GEDCOM files
 | 
						|
      you export will not be valid.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <figure id="druid-fig">
 | 
						|
        <title>GRAMPS Getting Started Window: Researcher Information</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <screenshot>
 | 
						|
          <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
            <imageobject>
 | 
						|
              <imagedata fileref="figures/researcher.png" format="PNG" />
 | 
						|
            </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <textobject>
 | 
						|
              <phrase>Shows Researcher Information Window.</phrase>
 | 
						|
            </textobject>
 | 
						|
          </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
        </screenshot>
 | 
						|
      </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <tip id="preferences-tip">
 | 
						|
        <title>Entering personal information</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>This information can be entered at any time in the Preferences
 | 
						|
        dialog, under the Database/Researcher Information category.</para>
 | 
						|
      </tip>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!---->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="choose-db-start">
 | 
						|
      <title>Choosing a database</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>If GRAMPS is started without a database selected, the initial
 | 
						|
      screen will have little functionality. Most operations will not be
 | 
						|
      available. To load a database, select either <guibutton>New</guibutton>
 | 
						|
      to create a new database, or <guibutton>Open</guibutton> to open an
 | 
						|
      existing database. GRAMPS keeps track of your recently opened databases,
 | 
						|
      and these can be selected by clicking on the arrow next to the
 | 
						|
      <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button and choosing from the drop down
 | 
						|
      menu.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <figure id="first-open">
 | 
						|
        <title>Initial Window</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <screenshot>
 | 
						|
          <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
            <imageobject>
 | 
						|
              <imagedata fileref="figures/first-open.png" format="PNG" />
 | 
						|
            </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <textobject>
 | 
						|
              <phrase>Initial Window.</phrase>
 | 
						|
            </textobject>
 | 
						|
          </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
        </screenshot>
 | 
						|
      </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!---->
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="get-help">
 | 
						|
      <title>Obtaining Help</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>GRAMPS has a <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>Help</guimenu>
 | 
						|
        </menuchoice> menu that you can consult at any time. It includes the
 | 
						|
      following items:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>User manual</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>An electronic version of the manual that you can access
 | 
						|
            while you work in GRAMPS.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>FAQ</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>A list of Frequently Asked Questions about GRAMPS.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>GRAMPS home page</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>A link to the GRAMPS' project web site.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>GRAMPS mailing lists</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>Gives you direct access to GRAMPS' mailing list
 | 
						|
            archives.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Report a bug</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>Choose this item to file a bug report in our bug tracking
 | 
						|
            system. (Remember, GRAMPS is a living project. We want to know
 | 
						|
            about any problems you encounter so we can work to solve them for
 | 
						|
            everyone's benefit.)</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Show plugin status</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>Use this item to display the status of any plugins you may
 | 
						|
            have added.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Open example database</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>Select this item to load the example database that is
 | 
						|
            included in your GRAMPS package. This database is composed of
 | 
						|
            fictitious people and serves as a useful example for learning how
 | 
						|
            to work with GRAMPS.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
  </chapter>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <chapter id="gramps-mainwin">
 | 
						|
    <title>Main Window</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>When you open a database (either existing or new), the following
 | 
						|
    window is displayed:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ==== Figure: Main Window  ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <figure id="mainwin-fig" pgwide="1">
 | 
						|
      <title>GRAMPS Main Window</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <screenshot>
 | 
						|
        <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          <imageobject>
 | 
						|
            <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/mainwin.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                       scale="100" width="" />
 | 
						|
          </imageobject>
 | 
						|
        </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
      </screenshot>
 | 
						|
    </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>The main GRAMPS window contains the following elements:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <variablelist>
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Menubar</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>The menubar is located at the very top of the window (right
 | 
						|
          below the window title) and provides access to all the features of
 | 
						|
          GRAMPS.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Toolbar</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>The toolbar is located right below the menubar. It gives you
 | 
						|
          access to the most frequently used functions of GRAMPS. You can set
 | 
						|
          options that control how it appears by going to <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
              <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
            </menuchoice>. You can also hide it entirely by going to
 | 
						|
          <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
              <guimenu>View</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <guisubmenu>Toolbar</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
            </menuchoice>.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Progress Bar</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>The Progress Bar is located in the lower left corner of the
 | 
						|
          GRAMPS window. It displays the progress of time consuming
 | 
						|
          operations, such as opening and saving large databases, importing
 | 
						|
          and exporting to other formats, generating web sites, etc. When you
 | 
						|
          are not doing these types of operations, the Progress Bar is
 | 
						|
          blank.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Status Bar</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>The Status Bar is located to the right of the Progress Bar, on
 | 
						|
          the very bottom of the GRAMPS window. It displays information about
 | 
						|
          current GRAMPS activity and contextual information about the
 | 
						|
          selected items. The behavior of the Status Bar can be adjusted in
 | 
						|
          the Preferences dialog, which can be found by selecting <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
              <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
            </menuchoice>.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Display area</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>The largest area in the center of the GRAMPS window is the
 | 
						|
          display area. What it displays depends on the currently selected
 | 
						|
          View. We'll discuss Views in detail below.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
    </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ================ Main Window Subsection  -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="gramps-views">
 | 
						|
      <title>Views</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>Genealogical information is very broad and can be extremely
 | 
						|
      detailed. Displaying it poses a challenge that GRAMPS takes on by
 | 
						|
      dividing and organizing the information into a series of Views. Each
 | 
						|
      View displays a portion of the total information, selected according to
 | 
						|
      a particular category. This will become clearer as we explore the
 | 
						|
      different Views, listed below:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>People</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Displays the list of all people in the database</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Relationships</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Shows the relationships between the selected person and other
 | 
						|
          people. This includes parents, spouses, and children</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Family List</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Shows the list of all families in the database</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Pedigree View</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Displays a graphical ancestor tree for the selected
 | 
						|
          person</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Events</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Displays the list of all events in the database</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Sources View</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Displays the list of all sources in the database</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Places View</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Displays the list of all places in the database</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Media View</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Displays the list of all media objects in the database</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Repositories</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Displays the list of all repositories in the database.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>Before we launch into a description of each View, let's first
 | 
						|
      explain how to switch between Views.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Main Window Sub-subsection  -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="view-modes">
 | 
						|
        <title>Switching Views and Viewing Modes</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>As mentioned above there are nine different Views. In addition,
 | 
						|
        there are two different Viewing Modes. You can tell at a glance which
 | 
						|
        Viewing Mode you are in: If you see icons listed vertically in a
 | 
						|
        sidebar at the left of the window, you are in the Sidebar Viewing
 | 
						|
        Mode. If instead you see a series of "notebook tabs" (labeled People,
 | 
						|
        Relationships, Family List, Pedigree, Events, Sources, Places, Media
 | 
						|
        and Repositories) that run horizontally across the window, then you
 | 
						|
        are in the Tabbed Viewing Mode. You can switch from one Viewing Mode
 | 
						|
        to another by selecting <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
            <guimenu>View</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <guimenuitem>Sidebar</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
          </menuchoice> from the Sidebar menu item.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>If you're in the Sidebar Viewing Mode, you can select the View
 | 
						|
        you want by clicking one of the sidebar icons.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Sidebar Mode ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="side-nofilt-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Sidebar Viewing Mode</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/mainwin.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           scale="100" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows sidebar viewing mode.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>If you're in the Tabbed Viewing Mode, you can select the View
 | 
						|
        you want by clicking the corresponding notebook tab.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Tabbed Notebook Mode ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="noside-nofilt-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Tabbed Viewing Mode</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/noside-nofilt.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" scale="" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows tabbed viewing mode.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Main Window Sub-subsection  -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="people-view">
 | 
						|
        <title>People View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>When GRAMPS first opens a database, it displays the People View
 | 
						|
        (<xref linkend="side-nofilt-fig" /> and <xref
 | 
						|
        linkend="noside-nofilt-fig" />). This view lists all the people stored
 | 
						|
        in the database.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>You'll note that people are grouped according to their family
 | 
						|
        names. To the left of each family name is an arrow. Clicking it once
 | 
						|
        will reveal the entire list of people sharing that name. Clicking the
 | 
						|
        arrow again will "roll up" the list and show only the family
 | 
						|
        name.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>By default, the People View, displays the following columns:
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Names</guilabel>, GRAMPS <guilabel>ID</guilabel> numbers,
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Gender</guilabel>, and their <guilabel>Birth</guilabel> and
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Death dates</guilabel>. You can add or remove columns to and
 | 
						|
        from the display by calling up the <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel>
 | 
						|
        dialog (<menuchoice>
 | 
						|
            <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <guimenuitem>Column Editor</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
          </menuchoice>) and checking or unchecking the boxes listed. You can
 | 
						|
        also change the position of a column in People View by clicking and
 | 
						|
        dragging it to a new position in the Editor. Once you have made the
 | 
						|
        changes you want, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to exit the Editor
 | 
						|
        and see your changes in the People View.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <note id="columns-tip">
 | 
						|
          <title>Column Editor</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>The Column Editor is available in all Views and works the same
 | 
						|
          way in each.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Enabled Filter ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="column-editor-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Column Editor Dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/column-editor.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows column editor dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ================ Main Window Sub-sub-subsection  -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <sect3 id="filters">
 | 
						|
          <title>Filters</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Genealogical databases can contain information on many people,
 | 
						|
          families, places, and objects. It's therefore possible for a View to
 | 
						|
          contain a long list of data that's difficult to work with. GRAMPS
 | 
						|
          gives you two different means for controlling this condition by
 | 
						|
          allowing you to filter a list to a more manageable size. These
 | 
						|
          methods are Search and Filtering.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Search is a simple but fast method of searching the columns
 | 
						|
          displayed on the screen. Typing the characters into the Search box
 | 
						|
          and clicking the Find button will display only lines that match the
 | 
						|
          text.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Alternatively, you can enable the Filter sidebar, which will
 | 
						|
          be displayed on the right hand side of the display. When the filter
 | 
						|
          sidebar is displayed, the Search bar is not displayed. The Filter
 | 
						|
          side bar allows you to interactively build a set of filter rules
 | 
						|
          that can be applied to the display. The filter is applied based on
 | 
						|
          the rules and the data, not on the screen display.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== Figure: Enabled Filter ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <figure id="side-filt-fig">
 | 
						|
            <title>Filter Controls Displayed</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <screenshot>
 | 
						|
              <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                  <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/side-filt.png"
 | 
						|
                             format="PNG" scale="" width="" />
 | 
						|
                </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <textobject>
 | 
						|
                  <phrase>Shows filter controls.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                </textobject>
 | 
						|
              </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
            </screenshot>
 | 
						|
          </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>When GRAMPS opens a database, no filtering is in effect. In
 | 
						|
          People View, for example, all people in the database are listed by
 | 
						|
          default.</para>
 | 
						|
        </sect3>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Main Window Sub-subsection  -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="relationships-view">
 | 
						|
        <title>Relationships View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The Relationships View displays the family relationships of a
 | 
						|
        selected person that we call the Active person. Specifically, it shows
 | 
						|
        his or her parents, spouses, and children.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The Relationships View is designed to allow for quick
 | 
						|
        navigation. You can quickly change the selected person simply by
 | 
						|
        clicking the name of any person listed on the page. Each name is
 | 
						|
        actually a hypertext link, similar to a web page.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Family View ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="family-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Relationsihps View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/family.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           scale="" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Relationships View.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The Relationships View displays the following sections:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Active person</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>At the top of the screen, name, ID, birth, and death
 | 
						|
              information of the active person is displayed. If a photo of the
 | 
						|
              person is available, it is shown on the right hand side. Next to
 | 
						|
              the person's name is a symbol indicating gender, and an Edit
 | 
						|
              button. Clicking the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button will
 | 
						|
              allow you to edit all of the person's individual information in
 | 
						|
              an Edit Person dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Parents</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The next sections display the person's parents and
 | 
						|
              siblings. Since it is possible to have multiple sets of parents,
 | 
						|
              it is possible to have several Parents sections. You can control
 | 
						|
              how much information is displayed by using the
 | 
						|
              <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. The view menu allows you to show
 | 
						|
              or hide details (the birth and death information) and to show or
 | 
						|
              hide siblings. Next to each person listed is an
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button, which will allow you to edit
 | 
						|
              all the details of that particular person.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>You may add, edit, or delete family information using the
 | 
						|
              buttons next to the Parents label. You can add a set of parents
 | 
						|
              by either selecting the Add button (the first button) or the
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button (the second button). The
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button will create a new family with
 | 
						|
              the active person listed as a child. The
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button will allow you to choose
 | 
						|
              from a list of existing families, and then add the person as a
 | 
						|
              child to that family.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <warning>
 | 
						|
                <para>If you are not careful, it is possible to create
 | 
						|
                multiple families with the same parents. This is rarely what
 | 
						|
                the user wants to do. If you attempt to add a new family that
 | 
						|
                has the same parents as an existing family, GRAMPS will issue
 | 
						|
                a warning dialog. If you get this dialog, you should probably
 | 
						|
                Cancel the edit, and then use the
 | 
						|
                <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button to select the existing
 | 
						|
                family.</para>
 | 
						|
              </warning>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Family</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Similar to the Parents section is the Family section,
 | 
						|
              which displays families where the person is a parent. Because it
 | 
						|
              is possible to have mulitple familes, it is possible to have
 | 
						|
              multiple Family sections. Each family section displays the
 | 
						|
              spouse and any children.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <note>
 | 
						|
                <para>We use the term <emphasis>spouse</emphasis> for sake of
 | 
						|
                simplicity. However, please note that
 | 
						|
                <emphasis>spouse</emphasis> may in fact be a domestic partner,
 | 
						|
                a partner in a civil union, or various other similar
 | 
						|
                relationships between two people. <emphasis>Spouse</emphasis>
 | 
						|
                relationships are not required to be only between a male and
 | 
						|
                female.</para>
 | 
						|
              </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>You may add, edit, or delete family information using the
 | 
						|
              buttons next to the Family label. You can add a spouse by
 | 
						|
              clicking the Add button (the first button), which will create a
 | 
						|
              new family with the active person listed as a father or mother.
 | 
						|
              Selecting the Edit button will allow you to edit the displayed
 | 
						|
              family. Clicking the Delete button will remove the person from
 | 
						|
              the displayed family.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <warning>
 | 
						|
                <para>Removing a person from a family does not delete the
 | 
						|
                family. The person is removed as the father or mother, and any
 | 
						|
                other relationships in the family continue to exist.</para>
 | 
						|
              </warning>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <note>
 | 
						|
                <para>We use the terms <emphasis>father</emphasis> and
 | 
						|
                <emphasis>mother</emphasis> for the sake of simplicity. Even
 | 
						|
                if there are no children in a family, the
 | 
						|
                <emphasis>father</emphasis> and <emphasis>mother</emphasis>
 | 
						|
                terminology is still used. In the case of male/male or
 | 
						|
                female/female relationships, one of the
 | 
						|
                <emphasis>father</emphasis> and <emphasis>mother</emphasis>
 | 
						|
                labels should be considered to be convenience labels, and
 | 
						|
                therefore interchangable.</para>
 | 
						|
              </note>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Main Window Sub-subsection  -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="family-list-view">
 | 
						|
        <title>Family List View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The Family List View displays a list of all families in the
 | 
						|
        database. From this view, you may add, edit, or delete families. The
 | 
						|
        default display lists the ID, Father, Mother, and Relationship.
 | 
						|
        Children cannot be displayed on the screen in this view.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Family View ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="family-list">
 | 
						|
          <title>Family List View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/family-list.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" scale="" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Family List View.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <warning>
 | 
						|
          <para>Unlike the Relationships View, clicking the Remove button in
 | 
						|
          this view will remove the family from the database. All people will
 | 
						|
          remain, but all relationships between the people in the family will
 | 
						|
          be removed.</para>
 | 
						|
        </warning>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="pedigree-view">
 | 
						|
        <title>Pedigree View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The Pedigree View displays a family tree of the Active person's
 | 
						|
        ancestors. The Pedigree View shows up to five generations, depending
 | 
						|
        on the size of the window. Each person is indicated by a box labeled
 | 
						|
        with his or her name, birth and death information, and optionally an
 | 
						|
        image if available. Two lines branch from each box. The top one shows
 | 
						|
        the person's father and the bottom one the mother. Solid lines
 | 
						|
        represent birth relations, while dashed lines represent non-birth
 | 
						|
        relations such as adoption, step-parenthood, guardianship, etc.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Pedigree View ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="pedigree-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Pedigree View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/pedigree.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" scale="" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Pedigree View.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To the left of the Active person is a left arrow button. If the
 | 
						|
        Active person has children, clicking this button expands a list of the
 | 
						|
        Active person's children. Selecting one of the children makes that
 | 
						|
        child the active Person.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The appearance of the children's names in the menu
 | 
						|
        differentiates the <emphasis>dead ends</emphasis> of the tree from the
 | 
						|
        continuing branches. Children who have children themselves appear in
 | 
						|
        the menu in the boldface and italic type, while children without
 | 
						|
        children (<emphasis>dead ends</emphasis>) appear in a regular font. If
 | 
						|
        the Active person has only one child, no menu will be displayed (since
 | 
						|
        there is only one choice) and the child will become the Active person
 | 
						|
        when the arrow button is clicked.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Pedigree View ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="pedigree-child-cut-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Children Menu</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/pedigree-child-cut.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Children Menu in Pedigree View.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The right-hand side of the window shows two right arrow buttons.
 | 
						|
        When the top button is clicked, the Father of the Active person
 | 
						|
        becomes the Active person. Clicking the bottom button makes the Mother
 | 
						|
        of the Active person the Active person.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Pedigree View ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="pedigree-siblings-cut-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Personal Context Menu</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth=""
 | 
						|
                           fileref="figures/pedigree-siblings-cut.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" scale="" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Context Menu in Pedigree View.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Right-clicking on any person's box in the Pedigree View will
 | 
						|
        bring up the "context menu". Among other useful items, the context
 | 
						|
        menu has sub-menus listing <guilabel>Spouses</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Siblings</guilabel>, <guilabel>Children</guilabel>, and
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Parents</guilabel> of that person. "Greyed-out" sub-menus
 | 
						|
        indicate the absence of the data in the appropriate category.
 | 
						|
        Similarly to the children menu above, Childrens' and Parents' menus
 | 
						|
        distinguish continuing lines from dead ends.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2>
 | 
						|
        <title>Events View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>New in version 2.2 is the inclusion of an Events View. Events
 | 
						|
        can be shared between between multiple people and multiple families.
 | 
						|
        The Events View lists the all the events recorded in the database. The
 | 
						|
        default view displays the <guilabel>Description</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, <guilabel>Type</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Date</guilabel>, <guilabel>Place</guilabel> and
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Cause</guilabel> of the event.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="events-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Events View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/events.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           scale="" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Events View.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <warning>
 | 
						|
          <para>Because events can be shared, you should take the extra time
 | 
						|
          to give each event a unique and meaningful description. This will
 | 
						|
          help you find the correct event if you decide to share
 | 
						|
          events.</para>
 | 
						|
        </warning>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The list of Events can be sorted in the usual manner, by
 | 
						|
        clicking on the column heading. Clcking once sorts in ascending order,
 | 
						|
        clicking again sorts in descending order. The <guilabel>Column
 | 
						|
        Editor</guilabel> dialog can be used to add, remove and rearrange the
 | 
						|
        displayed columns.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Main Window Sub-subsection  -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="sources-view">
 | 
						|
        <title>Sources View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Sources View lists the sources of certain information stored in
 | 
						|
        the database. These can include various documents (birth, death, and
 | 
						|
        marriage certificates, etc.), books, films, journals, private diaries,
 | 
						|
        - nearly anything that can provide genealogical evidence. GRAMPS gives
 | 
						|
        you the option to provide a source for each event you record (births,
 | 
						|
        deaths, marriages, etc.). The Source View lists the
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Title</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, and
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Author</guilabel> of the source, as well as any
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Publication</guilabel> information that may be associated
 | 
						|
        with it.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The list of Sources can be sorted in the usual manner, by
 | 
						|
        clicking on a column heading. Clicking once sorts in ascending order,
 | 
						|
        clicking again sorts in descending order. The <guilabel>Column
 | 
						|
        Editor</guilabel> dialog can be used to add, remove and rearrange the
 | 
						|
        displayed columns.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Sources View ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="sources-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Sources View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/sources.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           scale="" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Sources View.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Main Window Sub-subsection  -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="places-view">
 | 
						|
        <title>Places View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The Places View lists the geographical places in which the
 | 
						|
        events of the database took place. These could be places of birth,
 | 
						|
        death, and marriages of people, as well as their home, employment,
 | 
						|
        education addresses, or any other conceivable reference to the
 | 
						|
        geographical location. The Places View lists the places'
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Name</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, <guilabel>Church
 | 
						|
        Parish</guilabel>, <guilabel>City</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>County</guilabel>, <guilabel>State</guilabel>, and
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Country</guilabel>. All of these columns can be used for
 | 
						|
        sorting by the usual sorting rules. The <guilabel>Column
 | 
						|
        Editor</guilabel> dialog may be used to add, remove and rearrange the
 | 
						|
        displayed columns.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>If a place has been highlighted, you may select the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Google Maps</guibutton> button to attempt to display the
 | 
						|
        place in a web browser. Your default web browser should open,
 | 
						|
        attempting to use either the longitude and lattitude coordinates or
 | 
						|
        the place name to display the location using the Google Maps web site.
 | 
						|
        This feature is limited, and may not always produce the results you
 | 
						|
        desire.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Places View ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="places-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Places View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/places.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           scale="" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Places View.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Main Window Sub-subsection  -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="media-view">
 | 
						|
        <title>Media View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The Media View is a list of Media Objects used in the database.
 | 
						|
        Media Objects are any files that relate somehow to the stored
 | 
						|
        genealogical data. Technically, any file can be stored as a Media
 | 
						|
        Object. Most frequently, these are images, audio files, animation
 | 
						|
        files, etc. The list box on the bottom lists the
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Name</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Type</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Path</guilabel> of the Media
 | 
						|
        Object. The <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> dialog may be used to
 | 
						|
        rearrange the displayed columns, which obey usual sorting rules. The
 | 
						|
        top part of the GRAMPS window shows a preview (if available) and
 | 
						|
        information about the Media Object.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Media View ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="media-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Media View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/media.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           scale="" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Media View.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2>
 | 
						|
        <title>Repositories View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Version 2.2 adds support for Repositories. A repository can be
 | 
						|
        thought of as a collection of sources. Each source in the database can
 | 
						|
        reference a repository (such as a library) in which it belongs. The
 | 
						|
        functionality of the Repositories View is similar to the other
 | 
						|
        views.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="repository-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Repositories View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/repository.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" scale="" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Repositories View.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
  </chapter>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <chapter id="gramps-usage">
 | 
						|
    <title>Usage</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>Now we turn to a detailed exploration of the day-to-day use of
 | 
						|
    GRAMPS. First, we should point out that GRAMPS often offers more than one
 | 
						|
    way to do the same task. We'll try to point out some of these alternatives
 | 
						|
    where appropriate.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="new-db">
 | 
						|
      <title>Starting a New Database</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>To start a new database, choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>File</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
        </menuchoice> or select the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button from the
 | 
						|
      toolbar. You will then be asked to give the new database a name.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <note id="new-db-notdir-note">
 | 
						|
        <title>GRAMPS databases</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>GRAMPS stores your data in a Berkeley database, sometimes known
 | 
						|
        as BSDDB. These files have ".grdb" as their default extension. The
 | 
						|
        extension is automatically added to your filename.</para>
 | 
						|
      </note>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="open-db">
 | 
						|
      <title>Opening a Database</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>To open a database, either choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>File</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guimenuitem>Open</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
        </menuchoice> or click the <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button on the
 | 
						|
      Toolbar. The <guilabel>Open database</guilabel> dialog will appear and
 | 
						|
      you'll see a list of files. If you don't see the file you're looking
 | 
						|
      for, make sure the All files filter is selected. (This dialog has a
 | 
						|
      "filetype" filter, meaning it may only be showing files that have a
 | 
						|
      certain extension.)</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>To open a recently accessed database, choose either <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>File</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guimenuitem>Open Recent</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
        </menuchoice> or the down arrow next to the
 | 
						|
      <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button and select the filename from the
 | 
						|
      list.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>If you do not have "write permissions" for the selected database,
 | 
						|
      it will be opened in a Read Only mode. In this mode, the data may be
 | 
						|
      viewed, but no changes will be made to the database. To indicate this
 | 
						|
      mode, the title of the main window will be appended with <guilabel>(Read
 | 
						|
      Only)</guilabel> text.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>GRAMPS allows you to open certain databases that have not been
 | 
						|
      saved in GRAMPS' own file format. These include XML and GEDCOM
 | 
						|
      databases. But you should be aware that if the XML or GEDCOM database is
 | 
						|
      relatively large, you may encounter some performance problems. These can
 | 
						|
      be avoided by creating a new GRAMPS database and importing your
 | 
						|
      XML/GEDCOM data into it.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <note id="open-db-note2">
 | 
						|
        <title>Opening XML and GEDCOM databases</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>XML and GEDCOM databases require all data to be held in memory.
 | 
						|
        GRAMPS' native grdb format does not. Thus, a database with a grdb
 | 
						|
        format can access data quicker and more efficiently.</para>
 | 
						|
      </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <warning id="open-db-warn">
 | 
						|
        <title>GEDCOM Editing</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Please keep in mind that some information in a GEDCOM file may
 | 
						|
        be lost during import into GRAMPS. Simply opening and viewing the file
 | 
						|
        will not change it. However, if any changes were made and they were
 | 
						|
        not abandoned upon exit, exiting GRAMPS will save the data, with
 | 
						|
        possible data loss.</para>
 | 
						|
      </warning>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="save-db">
 | 
						|
      <title>Saving Changes to Your Database</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>GRAMPS saves your changes as soon as you apply them. This means,
 | 
						|
      for example, that any time you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when
 | 
						|
      using GRAMPS, your changes are immediately recorded and saved. There is
 | 
						|
      no separate "save" command (although there is a "save as" command that
 | 
						|
      we'll discuss later.)</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>You can undo changes you've made by selecting <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
        </menuchoice>. If you select this command repeatedly, your most recent
 | 
						|
      changes will be undone one at a time. To roll back multple commands at a
 | 
						|
      time, you can using the <guilabel>Undo History</guilabel> dialog
 | 
						|
      available from the <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> menu.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>If you want to return your database to the way it was when you
 | 
						|
      opened it, select <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>File</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guimenuitem>Abandon changes and quit</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
        </menuchoice>. (This is just like quitting without saving in other
 | 
						|
      programs.)</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>If you would like to save your database under a different name,
 | 
						|
      you can do so by choosing <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>File</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guimenuitem>Save as...</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
        </menuchoice> and specifying the name (and, optionally, the format) of
 | 
						|
      your new database. Note that "Save as" will allow you to continue
 | 
						|
      editing the newly saved database. If this is not what you want to do,
 | 
						|
      you may wish to use the "Export" command instead.</para>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="import-data">
 | 
						|
      <title>Importing Data</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>Importing allows you to bring data from other genealogy programs
 | 
						|
      into a GRAMPS database. Currently, GRAMPS can import data from the
 | 
						|
      following formats:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Another GRAMPS database (having the "grdb" file
 | 
						|
          extension),</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>GEDCOM</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>GRAMPS XML</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>GRAMPS package</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>GeneWeb</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <note id="import-note">
 | 
						|
        <title>Importing vs. opening</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Please recognize that importing a database is different from
 | 
						|
        opening a database. When you import, you are actually bringing data
 | 
						|
        from one database into a GRAMPS database. When you open a file, you
 | 
						|
        are editing your original file.</para>
 | 
						|
      </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>To import data, select <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>File</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
        </menuchoice>. The <guilabel>Import database</guilabel> dialog will
 | 
						|
      open, asking you to specify the file you wish to import.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <warning id="import-dataloss">
 | 
						|
        <title>Data loss with some formats</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>It is important to note that the importing process is not
 | 
						|
        perfect for GEDCOM and GeneWeb databases. There is a chance that some
 | 
						|
        of the data in these databases will not be imported into
 | 
						|
        GRAMPS.</para>
 | 
						|
      </warning>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>The GRAMPS database (grdb), GRAMPS XML, and GRAMPS package are all
 | 
						|
      native GRAMPS formats. There is no risk of information loss when import
 | 
						|
      or exporting to these formats.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>GRAMPS database (grdb)</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>The native GRAMPS database format is a specific form of
 | 
						|
            Berkeley database (BSDDB) with a special structure of data tables.
 | 
						|
            This format is binary and architecture-dependent. It is very quick
 | 
						|
            and efficient, but not generally portable across computers with
 | 
						|
            different binary architecture (e.g. i386 vs alpha).</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>GRAMPS XML</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>The GRAMPS XML file was the default format for older
 | 
						|
            versions of GRAMPS. Unlike the grdb format, it is architecture
 | 
						|
            independent and human-readable. The database may also have
 | 
						|
            references to non-local (external) media objects, therefore it is
 | 
						|
            not guaranteed to be completely portable. The GRAMPS XML database
 | 
						|
            is created by saving ( <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                <guimenu>File</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
              </menuchoice> ) or exporting ( <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                <guimenu>File</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <guimenuitem>Export...</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
              </menuchoice> ) data in that format</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>GRAMPS package</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>The GRAMPS package is a compressed archive containing the
 | 
						|
            GRAMPS XML file and all media objects (images, sound files, etc.)
 | 
						|
            to which the database refers. Because it contains all the media
 | 
						|
            objects, this format is completely portable. The GRAMPS package is
 | 
						|
            created by exporting ( <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                <guimenu>File</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <guimenuitem>Export...</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
              </menuchoice> ) data in that format.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>If you import information from another GRAMPS database or GRAMPS
 | 
						|
      XML database, you will see the progress of the operation in the progress
 | 
						|
      bar of GRAMPS' main window.</para>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="export-data">
 | 
						|
      <title>Exporting Data</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>Exporting allows you to share any portion of your GRAMPS database
 | 
						|
      with other researchers as well as to enable you to transfer your data to
 | 
						|
      another computer. Currently, GRAMPS can export data to the following
 | 
						|
      formats: GRAMPS database (grdb), GRAMPS XML, GEDCOM, GRAMPS package, Web
 | 
						|
      Family Tree, and GeneWeb.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <note id="export-note">
 | 
						|
        <title>Export is saving a copy</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>When you export, you are saving a copy of the currently opened
 | 
						|
        database. Exporting creates another file with a copy of your data.
 | 
						|
        Note that the database that remains opened in your GRAMPS window is
 | 
						|
        NOT the file saved by your export. Additional editing of the currently
 | 
						|
        opened database will not alter the copy produced by the export.</para>
 | 
						|
      </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>To export data, choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>File</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
        </menuchoice>. This will bring up the <guilabel>Export</guilabel>
 | 
						|
      assistant. Its pages will guide you through the format selection (see
 | 
						|
      <xref linkend="export-druid-fig" />), file selection, and format
 | 
						|
      specific export options (see <xref linkend="gedcom-export-fig" />).
 | 
						|
      After a final confirmation page, the export will be performed according
 | 
						|
      to the choices you have made. At any time, you can click the
 | 
						|
      <guibutton>Back</guibutton> and revise any selection, and then go
 | 
						|
      forward to redo the export.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ==== Figure: GEDCOM Export ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <figure id="export-druid-fig">
 | 
						|
        <title>Export assistant: format selection</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <screenshot>
 | 
						|
          <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
            <imageobject>
 | 
						|
              <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/export-druid.png"
 | 
						|
                         format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
            </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <textobject>
 | 
						|
              <phrase>Shows format selection page of an Export
 | 
						|
              assistant</phrase>
 | 
						|
            </textobject>
 | 
						|
          </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
        </screenshot>
 | 
						|
      </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="export-gedcom">
 | 
						|
        <title>Exporting into the GEDCOM format</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>GRAMPS allows you to export a database into the common GEDCOM
 | 
						|
        format. It provides options that allow you to fine tune your export
 | 
						|
        (see <xref linkend="gedcom-export-fig" />).</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Encoding</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Since different languages use different characters, it is
 | 
						|
              important to tell a GEDCOM file what character set is used. The
 | 
						|
              two formats traditionally accepted are ASCII and ANSEL. Since
 | 
						|
              all ASCII characters are valid ANSEL characters, GRAMPS does not
 | 
						|
              provide an option for ASCII.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>Because ANSEL is not commonly used, some genealogy
 | 
						|
              programs will accept ANSI (more commonly know as ISO-8859-1) and
 | 
						|
              Unicode character sets. Only select ANSI or Unicode if you know
 | 
						|
              any program that attempts to read the GEDCOM file will
 | 
						|
              understand these character sets.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Filter</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The filter allows you to export a limited amount of data,
 | 
						|
              based on the criteria you select.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Target</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>While GEDCOM is a standard, not every program implements
 | 
						|
              it in the same way. This can lead to data loss. GRAMPS can
 | 
						|
              reduce the data loss in some cases. You can tell GRAMPS what
 | 
						|
              program is the target, and GRAMPS will customize the exported
 | 
						|
              file for that program. If your program is not listed, choose the
 | 
						|
              "GEDCOM 5.5 Standard".</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Copyright</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Allows you to select a statement to describe your
 | 
						|
              Copyright claim.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>No not include records marked private</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Check this box to prevent private records from being
 | 
						|
              included in the exported file.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Restrict data on living people</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Check this box to limit the information exported for
 | 
						|
              living people. This means that all information concerning their
 | 
						|
              birth, death, addresses, significant events, etc., will be
 | 
						|
              omitted in the exported GEDCOM file. If you choose this option,
 | 
						|
              you will be given additional options to limit further the data
 | 
						|
              on living people. For example, you can choose to substitute the
 | 
						|
              word "Living" for the first name; you can exclude notes; and you
 | 
						|
              can exclude sources for living people.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>Sometimes, it is not always obvious from the data if
 | 
						|
              someone is actually alive. GRAMPS uses an advanced algorithm to
 | 
						|
              try to determine if a person could still be alive. Remember,
 | 
						|
              GRAMPS is making its best guess, and it may not always be able
 | 
						|
              to guess correctly all the time. Please double check your
 | 
						|
              data.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Reference images from path</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Check this box to tell GRAMPS to use the specific path for
 | 
						|
              your images when writing image references in GEDCOM.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>This option allows specify where your image files are
 | 
						|
              located. This is useful when you are transfering your GEDCOM
 | 
						|
              file from one computer to another. It tells the program that is
 | 
						|
              importing the data where your images are.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: GEDCOM Export ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="gedcom-export-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Export assistant: GEDCOM options</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/gedcom-export.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows GEDCOM options page of an Export druid</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Export ==== -->
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="export-gramps-formats">
 | 
						|
        <title>Export into GRAMPS formats</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>GRAMPS database (grdb) export</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Exporting to the GRAMPS native format will simply make a
 | 
						|
              copy of your data under another name. Exporting to this format
 | 
						|
              can also be useful if you have directly opened an XML or GEDCOM
 | 
						|
              file and would like to save it as the grdb file.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>GRAMPS XML database export</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Exporting into GRAMPS XML format will produce a database
 | 
						|
              compatible with the previous versions of GRAMPS. As XML is a
 | 
						|
              text-based human-readable format, you may also use it to take a
 | 
						|
              look at your data.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>GRAMPS package export</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Exporting to the GRAMPS package format will create a
 | 
						|
              compressed file that contains the database and copies of all
 | 
						|
              associated media files. This is useful if you want to move your
 | 
						|
              database to another computer or to share it with someone.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Export to CD</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Exporting to CD will prepare your database and copies of
 | 
						|
              all media object files for recording onto a CD. To actually burn
 | 
						|
              the CD, you will need to go to the GNOME
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>burn:///</guilabel> location, which can be accessed by
 | 
						|
              navigating through Nautilus: After exporting to CD, select
 | 
						|
              <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                  <guimenu>Go</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <guisubmenu>CD Creator</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
                </menuchoice> in the Nautilus menu. Your database directory
 | 
						|
              will show up. To burn it to the CD, click the CD icon on the
 | 
						|
              Nautilus toolbar, or select <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                  <guimenu>File</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <guisubmenu>Write to CD</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
                </menuchoice> in the Nautilus menu.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>If a media file is not found during export, you will see the
 | 
						|
        same <guilabel>Missing Media</guilabel> dialog you encounter with
 | 
						|
        GEDCOM export.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="export-other-formats">
 | 
						|
        <title>Export into other formats</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Web Family Tree</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Exporting to Web Family Tree will create a text file that
 | 
						|
              can be used by the Web Family Tree program. Export options
 | 
						|
              include filter selection and the ability to limit data on living
 | 
						|
              people to that of their family ties.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>GeneWeb</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Exporting to GeneWeb will save a copy of your data into a
 | 
						|
              popular web genealogy format. To find out more about GeneWeb and
 | 
						|
              its format, visit <ulink type="http"
 | 
						|
              url="http://cristal.inria.fr/~ddr/GeneWeb/en/">http://cristal.inria.fr/~ddr/GeneWeb/en/</ulink>.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>vCalendar and vCard</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Exporting to vCalendar or vCard will save information in a
 | 
						|
              format used in many calendaring and addressbook applications,
 | 
						|
              sometimes called PIM for Personal Information Manager.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="gramps-edit-quick">
 | 
						|
      <title>Entering and Editing Data: Quick Start Overview</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>This section is designed to give you the basic knowledge necessary
 | 
						|
      to start putting your genealogical information into GRAMPS. It will
 | 
						|
      explain how to enter people into the database and how to specify their
 | 
						|
      family relationships. (A more detailed explanation will follow in the
 | 
						|
      section entitled <xref linkend="gramps-edit-complete" />.)</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>First, let's identify the types of information you can enter into
 | 
						|
      your GRAMPS database. These include:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Personal information about an individual (names, addresses,
 | 
						|
          birth and death dates, etc.)</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Information about an individual's relationships (marriages,
 | 
						|
          divorces, civil unions, etc.)</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Information about an individual's parents and children</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Sources that document your research</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <note id="keybind">
 | 
						|
        <title>Keybindings</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>In addition to interacting with GRAMPS through menu items and
 | 
						|
        buttons, you can use its extensive set of "keybindings." For more
 | 
						|
        information, see <xref linkend="append-keybind" />.</para>
 | 
						|
      </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>Now let's take a quick look at how you can enter and edit these
 | 
						|
      various types of information.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-add-pers">
 | 
						|
        <title>To Add or Edit a Person</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>There are multiple ways to add a person to the database. We will
 | 
						|
        cover some of them as we proceed. The simplest way to enter a person
 | 
						|
        to add them from the People View. While you are in the People View
 | 
						|
        (<xref linkend="side-nofilt-fig" />), click the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Add</guibutton> on the toolbar. Enter any data you know
 | 
						|
        about this person into the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog
 | 
						|
        (see <xref linkend="edit-pers-fig" /> for details).</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To edit information about a person already present in the
 | 
						|
        database, select the person from the People View and click the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the toolbar.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <note id="person-menu">
 | 
						|
          <title>Alternate ways of adding or editing a person from the People
 | 
						|
          View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>You can also use <guilabel>Add...</guilabel> and
 | 
						|
          <guilabel>Edit...</guilabel> menu items available under
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>. Or you can right-click on the person and
 | 
						|
          select <guilabel>Add...</guilabel> or <guilabel>Edit...</guilabel>
 | 
						|
          from the context menu that pops up.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>People can also be added to the database in the Relationships
 | 
						|
        View, Edit Family dialog, and other places where it makes
 | 
						|
        sense.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-spec-rel">
 | 
						|
        <title>To Specify a Relationship</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>There are two primary ways to specify relationships between
 | 
						|
        people - using the Relationships View and using the Edit Family dialog
 | 
						|
        from the Family List View. The Family List is usually used to build
 | 
						|
        all the relationships within a single family at a time. The
 | 
						|
        Relationships View is usually used to build multiple relationships to
 | 
						|
        a single person.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To specify a new relationship to the selected person, switch to
 | 
						|
        the Relationships View (<xref linkend="family-fig" />) and you'll see
 | 
						|
        this individual indicated as the "Active person". Next to the
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Family</guilabel> label is a <guibutton>Add</guibutton>
 | 
						|
        button (typically represented by a <guibutton>+</guibutton> sign).
 | 
						|
        Clicking the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button will display the Edit
 | 
						|
        Family dialog with the selected person set as either the father or the
 | 
						|
        mother.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="edit-family">
 | 
						|
          <title>Editing a family</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata fileref="figures/edit-family.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Editing a family.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Now a question: Does the person who will form the relationship
 | 
						|
        with the Active person already exist in the database? If yes, click
 | 
						|
        the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button to the other person. You'll
 | 
						|
        then be able to browse through the list of people in the database to
 | 
						|
        select the one you want. If not, click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton>
 | 
						|
        button. This will allow you to add a new person to the database and to
 | 
						|
        specify the relationship this person has to the Active person.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="select-person">
 | 
						|
          <title>Selecting a person</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata fileref="figures/select-person.png" format="PNG" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Selecting a person.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <note id="spouse-filter">
 | 
						|
          <title>Filtering</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>By default, GRAMPS filters the displayed list to show only
 | 
						|
          those people who could theoretically have a relationship with the
 | 
						|
          Active Person. That is, GRAMPS only shows those people whose birth
 | 
						|
          dates and death dates fit within the lifetime of the Active Person.
 | 
						|
          If you wish, you can add a person to the list by clicking the
 | 
						|
          <guibutton>+</guibutton> button. To completely override the filter
 | 
						|
          and display all people from the database, check the <guilabel>Show
 | 
						|
          all</guilabel> box.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To edit an existing relationship from the Relationships View,
 | 
						|
        click on the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button next to corresponding
 | 
						|
        Family entry. If there is more than one relationship in the list, you
 | 
						|
        can select the spouse or partner you want by clicking the
 | 
						|
        corresponding <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button next to the
 | 
						|
        relationship.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To specify a new relationship in the Family List View, click on
 | 
						|
        the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button on the toolbar, and an empty
 | 
						|
        Edit Family dialog will open. At this point, you can add people to the
 | 
						|
        family.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-spec-par">
 | 
						|
        <title>To Specify Parents</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>You can specify Active person's parents in the Relationship
 | 
						|
        View(<xref linkend="family-fig" />). A little care is required to
 | 
						|
        prevent the creation of duplicate families. If you wish to add the
 | 
						|
        active person to an already existing family, you should click the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button. If the family including the
 | 
						|
        parents does not already exist, you should click the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>If you click on the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button, you
 | 
						|
        are presented with the Select Family dialog. This will allow you to
 | 
						|
        select the existing family, and then the Active person will be added
 | 
						|
        as a child to the family.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="select-family">
 | 
						|
          <title>Selecting a family</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata fileref="figures/select-family.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Selecting a family.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>If you click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, a new
 | 
						|
        Edit Family dialog is presented with the Active person listed a child
 | 
						|
        of the new family. You can add the parents to the family by either
 | 
						|
        adding new people as the parents or selecting existing people as the
 | 
						|
        parents.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <warning>
 | 
						|
          <para>If you create a new family and select parents that are already
 | 
						|
          in an existing family, GRAMPS will issue a warning message. If you
 | 
						|
          proceed by saving the new famiy, you will have a duplicate
 | 
						|
          family.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <figure id="family-warn">
 | 
						|
            <title>Duplicate family warning</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <screenshot>
 | 
						|
              <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                  <imagedata fileref="figures/family-warn.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                             width="" />
 | 
						|
                </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <textobject>
 | 
						|
                  <phrase>Duplicate family warning.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                </textobject>
 | 
						|
              </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
            </screenshot>
 | 
						|
          </figure>
 | 
						|
        </warning>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>You can also specify the parents of a person in the Family List
 | 
						|
        View. If the family already exists, click on the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the tool bar and add the person
 | 
						|
        as a child when the Edit Family dialog is displayed. If the family
 | 
						|
        does not already exist, click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button to
 | 
						|
        create a new family, and add the appropriate parents and
 | 
						|
        children.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-spec-ch">
 | 
						|
        <title>To Specify Children</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Adding children to a relationship is done through a similar
 | 
						|
        proceedure. From the Relationships View or the Family List View,
 | 
						|
        select the existing family or create a new family. Children can be
 | 
						|
        added by selecting the Add button or Select button to the right of the
 | 
						|
        child list.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Clicking the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button will display the
 | 
						|
        Edit Person dialog, allowing you to enter a new person. Clicking on
 | 
						|
        the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button, will allow you to select an
 | 
						|
        existing person from a list. By default, the child is added with a the
 | 
						|
        relationship type of birth to both parents.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>If you wish to change the parent/child relationship from the
 | 
						|
        default setting of birth, select the child and click on the Edit
 | 
						|
        button. This will display the Edit Child Reference dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="child-ref">
 | 
						|
          <title>Child Reference Editor</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata fileref="figures/child-ref.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Child Reference Editor.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-add-img">
 | 
						|
        <title>Adding Photos and Other Media Objects</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>You can add photos and other media objects to individual people,
 | 
						|
        events, sources, and places. You can also add images that might not be
 | 
						|
        limited to a single person or event (for example, group family
 | 
						|
        photos).</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>If you want to add an image to a single person, switch to the
 | 
						|
        People View (<xref linkend="side-nofilt-fig" />), select a person, and
 | 
						|
        then click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the toolbar. This
 | 
						|
        will bring up the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog (<xref
 | 
						|
        linkend="edit-pers-fig" />). Next, select the
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab, and click the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>+</guibutton> button to call up the <guilabel>Select a
 | 
						|
        media object</guilabel> dialog. Type a filename or browse to find the
 | 
						|
        image file you want and then provide a title for that image. Keep
 | 
						|
        adding images until you are done.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To add images related to a relationship (for example, a
 | 
						|
        marriage), switch to the Family View (<xref linkend="family-fig" />)
 | 
						|
        and double-click on the Spouse box. This calls up the
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Marriage/Relationship editor</guilabel> dialog. Select the
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab and click the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>+</guibutton> button to add an image.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To add images related to a source or a place, first switch to
 | 
						|
        the Source View (<xref linkend="sources-fig" />) or Place View (<xref
 | 
						|
        linkend="places-fig" />). Select the source or place you want and then
 | 
						|
        either double-click on it or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
 | 
						|
        icon on the toolbar. Select the <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab and
 | 
						|
        click the <guibutton>+</guibutton> button to add an image.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Finally, to add images that you want to include in the database,
 | 
						|
        but hare are not limited to any particular person, relationship,
 | 
						|
        source or place, switch to the Media View (<xref
 | 
						|
        linkend="media-fig" />). Then click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton>
 | 
						|
        icon on the toolbar to add an image. If you have already added any
 | 
						|
        images to any individual galleries, you will also find them listed in
 | 
						|
        the Media View.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <note id="alt-add-image">
 | 
						|
          <title>Alternate way of adding images to galleries</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>An image can always be added to any gallery by using
 | 
						|
          drag-and-drop. Items can be dragged from the Media View, any
 | 
						|
          gallery, the desktop, the file manager or a web browser and dropped
 | 
						|
          on the target gallery, adding the image to the gallery.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>In any gallery, you can also use the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
 | 
						|
        to edit image information and the <guibutton>-</guibutton> button and
 | 
						|
        to remove the image reference from that gallery.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <note id="remove-image-from-gallery">
 | 
						|
          <title>Removing an image from a gallery</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Removing a media object from a gallery does not remove the
 | 
						|
          image from the database. To completely remove the image from the
 | 
						|
          database, delete it from Media View by first selecting it and then
 | 
						|
          clicking the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> icon on the
 | 
						|
          toolbar.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-edit-src-plc">
 | 
						|
        <title>To Edit Sources and Places</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To add a source or a place to the database, switch to the
 | 
						|
        appropriate Source View (<xref linkend="sources-fig" />) or Place View
 | 
						|
        (<xref linkend="places-fig" />). Then click the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Add</guibutton> icon on the toolbar to add a source/place.
 | 
						|
        Enter the information into the <guilabel>Source Editor</guilabel> (or
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Place Editor</guilabel>) dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To edit information about sources and places already present in
 | 
						|
        the database, switch to the appropriate view, select an entry you
 | 
						|
        would like to view/modify, and then click the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the toolbar. Alternatively, you
 | 
						|
        may double-click on the entry to edit it.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="gramps-edit-complete">
 | 
						|
      <title>Entering and Editing Data: Complete Description</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>The previous section offered you a quick overview of how to enter
 | 
						|
      and edit data in GRAMPS. This section continues that discussion in much
 | 
						|
      greater detail.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>As we have seen above, GRAMPS offers you a series of Views. Each
 | 
						|
      of these Views gives you opportunities to enter and edit information. In
 | 
						|
      fact, you can often get to the same information from different
 | 
						|
      Views.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>In GRAMPS, information is entered and edited through what we call
 | 
						|
      dialogs. Since we use that term frequently, we should define what we
 | 
						|
      mean by it:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>A dialog is a pop-up window that provides one or more forms for
 | 
						|
      entering and editing data that fits a certain category. Examples in
 | 
						|
      GRAMPS include the Edit Person dialog and the Marriage/Relationship
 | 
						|
      dialog, among many others.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>A dialog often includes a series of "notebook tabs" that group the
 | 
						|
      information into subcategories. For example, the Edit Person dialog has
 | 
						|
      notebook tabs for subcategories such as Events, Attributes, Addresses,
 | 
						|
      and Notes, among others.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <note id="edit-button-note">
 | 
						|
        <title>Add, Remove, and Edit buttons</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>In most cases, GRAMPS uses a <guibutton>+</guibutton> to
 | 
						|
        correspond to <guibutton>Add</guibutton>, a <guibutton>-</guibutton>
 | 
						|
        correspond to <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>, and an icon of a pen on a
 | 
						|
        sheet of paper to denote <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>. We will continue
 | 
						|
        referring to the latter as the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button,
 | 
						|
        while using <guibutton>+</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> to
 | 
						|
        denote the two former buttons.</para>
 | 
						|
      </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="adv-pers">
 | 
						|
        <title>Editing Information About People</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Information about people is entered and edited through the
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog. This dialog can be invoked
 | 
						|
        from different Views in the following ways:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>From the People View:</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
                <listitem>
 | 
						|
                  <para>Double-click the name of the person whose data you
 | 
						|
                  would like to edit</para>
 | 
						|
                </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <listitem>
 | 
						|
                  <para>Select the name by single click and then click the
 | 
						|
                  <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the toolbar.</para>
 | 
						|
                </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <listitem>
 | 
						|
                  <para>Select the name and then press
 | 
						|
                  <keycap>Enter</keycap>.</para>
 | 
						|
                </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <listitem>
 | 
						|
                  <para>Select <guimenuitem>Edit...</guimenuitem> from the
 | 
						|
                  <guisubmenu>Edit</guisubmenu> menu of GRAMPS</para>
 | 
						|
                </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <listitem>
 | 
						|
                  <para>Select <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem> from the
 | 
						|
                  context menu that appears upon right-click on the
 | 
						|
                  name.</para>
 | 
						|
                </listitem>
 | 
						|
              </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>From the Relationships View:</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>To edit the active person's data, click on the Edit button
 | 
						|
              next to the active person's name.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>From the Pedigree View:</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Double-click in the box having the name of the person
 | 
						|
              whose data you want to edit.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>In each of the above cases, the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel>
 | 
						|
        dialog will appear:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="edit-pers-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Edit Person dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/edit-person.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The top of the window shows the basic information about the
 | 
						|
        person whose data is being edited. Below are several "notebook tabs"
 | 
						|
        containing different categories of available information. Click any
 | 
						|
        tab to view and edit its contents. Clicking the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom will apply all the
 | 
						|
        changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without
 | 
						|
        applying any changes. If any data in any tabs were modified, an alert
 | 
						|
        window will appear, prompting you to choose from the following
 | 
						|
        options: close the dialog without saving changes, cancel the initial
 | 
						|
        cancel request, or save the changes.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <note>
 | 
						|
          <para>Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
 | 
						|
          changes to the database. There is no need for a Save operation,
 | 
						|
          since all changes are immediate.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
 | 
						|
          data. If not, it has no data.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The general information is at the top of the window. This
 | 
						|
        includes the primary name and general information.:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Primary Name</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>includes <guilabel>Given name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Family
 | 
						|
              name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Family prefix</guilabel> (such as
 | 
						|
              "de" or "van"), <guilabel>Suffix</guilabel> (e.g. Jr. or III),
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Title</guilabel> (e.g. Dr. or Rev.),
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Nickname</guilabel> (Bob for Robert),
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Type</guilabel> of the name (birth name, married name,
 | 
						|
              etc.). Some of these <guilabel>Family name</guilabel> and
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Type</guilabel> fields provide "autocompletion"
 | 
						|
              feature: as you type in these fields, a menu appears below the
 | 
						|
              field containing database entries that match your partial input.
 | 
						|
              This gives you a shortcut by letting you select an entry that
 | 
						|
              already exists in the database rather than having to type it all
 | 
						|
              out. You can select the entry using your mouse or using your
 | 
						|
              arrow and <keycap>Enter</keycap> keys.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> (that is, the "pen and
 | 
						|
              paper" icon) next to the <guilabel>Prefix</guilabel> entry field
 | 
						|
              invokes the <guilabel>Name Editor</guilabel> dialog. This dialog
 | 
						|
              allows editing the preferred name in full detail (see <xref
 | 
						|
              linkend="adv-an" />).</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>General</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Gender</guilabel> menu offers the choice of
 | 
						|
              person's gender : <guilabel>male</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>female</guilabel>, and
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>unknown</guilabel>.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The field <guilabel>ID</guilabel> displays the GRAMPS ID
 | 
						|
              number which identifies the user in the database. This value
 | 
						|
              helps you distiguish between people who have the same name. You
 | 
						|
              may enter any unique value you want. If you do not provide a
 | 
						|
              value, GRAMPS will automatically select a value for you.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Marker</guilabel> allows you to specify som
 | 
						|
              basic information on the status of your research.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Privacy</guilabel> button lets you mark
 | 
						|
              whether or not the person's record is considered private.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Image</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> area shows the first image
 | 
						|
              available in the <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> of this person (if
 | 
						|
              any exist).</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The tabs reflect the following categories of personal
 | 
						|
        data:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Events</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit
 | 
						|
              any events relevant to the person. The bottom part of the window
 | 
						|
              lists all such events stored in the database. The top part shows
 | 
						|
              the details of the currently selected event in the list (if
 | 
						|
              any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow
 | 
						|
              you to add, modify, and remove an event record from the
 | 
						|
              database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an
 | 
						|
              event is selected from the list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Names</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Names ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Names</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit
 | 
						|
              any alternate names the person may have. The bottom part of the
 | 
						|
              window lists all alternate names for the person stored in the
 | 
						|
              database. The top part shows the details of the currently
 | 
						|
              selected name in the list (if any). The buttons
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow the addition, modification, and
 | 
						|
              removal of an alternate name from the database. Note that the
 | 
						|
              Edit and - buttons become available only when an alternate name
 | 
						|
              is selected from the list.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <figure id="edit-pers-names-fig">
 | 
						|
                <title>Edit Person dialog - Names</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <screenshot>
 | 
						|
                  <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                    <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                      <imagedata depth=" "
 | 
						|
                                 fileref="figures/edit-person-names.png"
 | 
						|
                                 format="PNG" width=" " />
 | 
						|
                    </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <textobject>
 | 
						|
                      <phrase>Shows Names Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                    </textobject>
 | 
						|
                  </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                </screenshot>
 | 
						|
              </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>When you add a new name or edit an existing name, the
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Name Editor</guilabel> dialog is invoked. This dialog
 | 
						|
              is described in the section below (see <xref
 | 
						|
              linkend="adv-an" />).</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Attributes</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab lets you view and
 | 
						|
              assign attributes to the person. You have complete freedom to
 | 
						|
              define and use attributes. For example, attributes might be
 | 
						|
              assigned to describe the person's physical characteristics or
 | 
						|
              personality traits.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>Note that each attribute listed in the
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Attribute</guilabel> dialog consists of two parts: the
 | 
						|
              Attribute itself and a Value associated with that Attribute.
 | 
						|
              This so-called "Parameter-Value" pairing can help you organize
 | 
						|
              and systematize your research. For example, if you define "Hair
 | 
						|
              color" as an Attribute for a person, "Hair Color" will become a
 | 
						|
              selectable Attribute for all other people. The Value of Hair
 | 
						|
              Color for person A might be red, and brown for person B. In
 | 
						|
              similar fashion, you might define an Attribute like "Generosity"
 | 
						|
              and use the Value of "Enormous" to describe a particularly
 | 
						|
              generous person.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The bottom part of the dialog window displays the list of
 | 
						|
              all Attributes stored in the database. The top part shows the
 | 
						|
              details of the currently selected attribute in the list (if
 | 
						|
              any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
 | 
						|
              you add, modify, and remove an attribute record from the
 | 
						|
              database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an
 | 
						|
              attribute is selected from the list.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Attributes ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <figure id="edit-pers-attributes-fig">
 | 
						|
                <title>Edit Person dialog - Attributes</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <screenshot>
 | 
						|
                  <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                    <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                      <imagedata depth=""
 | 
						|
                                 fileref="figures/edit-person-attributes.png"
 | 
						|
                                 format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
                    </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <textobject>
 | 
						|
                      <phrase>Shows Attributes Tab of Edit Person
 | 
						|
                      dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                    </textobject>
 | 
						|
                  </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                </screenshot>
 | 
						|
              </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Addresses</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Addresses</guilabel> tab lets you view and
 | 
						|
              record the various addresses of the person. The bottom part of
 | 
						|
              the window lists all addresses stored in the database. The top
 | 
						|
              part shows the details of the currently selected address in the
 | 
						|
              list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow
 | 
						|
              you to correspondingly add, modify, and remove an address record
 | 
						|
              from the database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an
 | 
						|
              address is selected from the list.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>Some reports allow you to restrict data on living people.
 | 
						|
              In particular, that option will omit their addresses.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Addresses ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <figure id="edit-pers-addresses-fig">
 | 
						|
                <title>Edit Person dialog - Addresses</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <screenshot>
 | 
						|
                  <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                    <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                      <imagedata depth=" "
 | 
						|
                                 fileref="figures/edit-person-addresses.png"
 | 
						|
                                 format="PNG" width=" " />
 | 
						|
                    </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <textobject>
 | 
						|
                      <phrase>Shows Addresses Tab of Edit Person
 | 
						|
                      dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                    </textobject>
 | 
						|
                  </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                </screenshot>
 | 
						|
              </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Notes</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Notes ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <figure id="edit-pers-notes-fig">
 | 
						|
                <title>Edit Person dialog - Notes</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <screenshot>
 | 
						|
                  <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                    <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                      <imagedata depth=" "
 | 
						|
                                 fileref="figures/edit-person-notes.png"
 | 
						|
                                 format="PNG" width=" " />
 | 
						|
                    </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <textobject>
 | 
						|
                      <phrase>Shows Notes Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                    </textobject>
 | 
						|
                  </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                </screenshot>
 | 
						|
              </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Notes</guilabel> tab provides a place to
 | 
						|
              record various items about the person that do not fit neatly
 | 
						|
              into other categories. To add a note or modify existing notes
 | 
						|
              simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option lets you set the
 | 
						|
              way the note will appear in reports and web pages. If you select
 | 
						|
              "Flowed," the text generated will have single spaces put in
 | 
						|
              place of all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line
 | 
						|
              characters. A blank line inserted between two blocks of text
 | 
						|
              will signal a new paragraph; additional inserted lines will be
 | 
						|
              ignored.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>If you select the Preformatted option, the text in reports
 | 
						|
              and web pages will appear exactly as you enter it in the Notes
 | 
						|
              dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Sources</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Sources ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <figure id="edit-pers-sources-fig">
 | 
						|
                <title>Edit Person dialog - Sources</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <screenshot>
 | 
						|
                  <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                    <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                      <imagedata depth=" "
 | 
						|
                                 fileref="figures/edit-person-sources.png"
 | 
						|
                                 format="PNG" width=" " />
 | 
						|
                    </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <textobject>
 | 
						|
                      <phrase>Shows Sources Tab of Edit Person
 | 
						|
                      dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                    </textobject>
 | 
						|
                  </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                </screenshot>
 | 
						|
              </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab allows you to view
 | 
						|
              and document the sources for the information you collect. These
 | 
						|
              might be general sources that do not describe a specific event,
 | 
						|
              but which nevertheless yield information about the person. For
 | 
						|
              example, if Aunt Martha's memoirs mention her great-grandson
 | 
						|
              Paul, the researcher may assume that this Paul actually existed
 | 
						|
              and cite Aunt Martha's memoirs as the source that justifies this
 | 
						|
              assumption.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <tip>
 | 
						|
                <para>Sources which document specific events are best recorded
 | 
						|
                as sources of the event (under the <guilabel>Events</guilabel>
 | 
						|
                tab) instead of as a source of the person. The person's
 | 
						|
                <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab is best used for any sources
 | 
						|
                not specificly connected to any other data.</para>
 | 
						|
              </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The central part displays the list of all source
 | 
						|
              references stored in the database in relation to the person. The
 | 
						|
              buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add,
 | 
						|
              modify, and remove a source reference to this person. Note that
 | 
						|
              the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
 | 
						|
              buttons become available only when a source reference is
 | 
						|
              selected from the list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Gallery</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you view and
 | 
						|
              store photos, videos, and other media objects that are
 | 
						|
              associated with the person. The central part of the window lists
 | 
						|
              all such media objects. Any object in the form of a valid image
 | 
						|
              file will result in the display of a thumbnail view of the
 | 
						|
              image. For other objects such as audio files, movie files, etc.,
 | 
						|
              a corresponding file type icon is displayed instead.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <tip>
 | 
						|
                <para>The first available image in the gallery will be also
 | 
						|
                displayed in the <guilabel>Image</guilabel> area in the
 | 
						|
                <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab.</para>
 | 
						|
              </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Select</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add a new image to the
 | 
						|
              database, link to an image already stored in the database,
 | 
						|
              modify an image, and remove a given media object from the
 | 
						|
              person's gallery. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a
 | 
						|
              media object is selected from the list.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Gallery ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <figure id="edit-pers-gallery-fig">
 | 
						|
                <title>Edit Person dialog - Gallery</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <screenshot>
 | 
						|
                  <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                    <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                      <imagedata depth=""
 | 
						|
                                 fileref="figures/edit-person-gallery.png"
 | 
						|
                                 format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
                    </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <textobject>
 | 
						|
                      <phrase>Shows Gallery Tab of Edit Person
 | 
						|
                      dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                    </textobject>
 | 
						|
                  </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                </screenshot>
 | 
						|
              </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <note>
 | 
						|
                <para>Removing a media object from a person's gallery does not
 | 
						|
                remove it from the database. It only removes the reference to
 | 
						|
                that object from this person's record.</para>
 | 
						|
              </note>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Internet</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Internet</guilabel> tab displays Internet
 | 
						|
              addresses relevant to the person. The bottom part lists all such
 | 
						|
              Internet addresses and accompanying descriptions. The top part
 | 
						|
              shows the details of the currently selected addresses in the
 | 
						|
              list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
 | 
						|
              you add, modify, and remove an Internet address. The "Go" button
 | 
						|
              (represented by an icon having a green arrow and yellow circle)
 | 
						|
              opens your web browser and takes you directly to the highlighted
 | 
						|
              page. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton>, and <guibutton>Go</guibutton> buttons
 | 
						|
              become available only when an address is selected from the
 | 
						|
              list.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - Internet ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <figure id="edit-pers-internet-fig">
 | 
						|
                <title>Edit Person dialog - Internet</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <screenshot>
 | 
						|
                  <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                    <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                      <imagedata depth=""
 | 
						|
                                 fileref="figures/edit-person-internet.png"
 | 
						|
                                 format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
                    </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <textobject>
 | 
						|
                      <phrase>Shows Internet Tab of Edit Person
 | 
						|
                      dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                    </textobject>
 | 
						|
                  </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                </screenshot>
 | 
						|
              </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Associations</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Associations</guilabel> tab lets you view
 | 
						|
              and edit information about the associations between people in
 | 
						|
              the database. The associations may include Godparents, family
 | 
						|
              friends, or any other types of associations you may wish to
 | 
						|
              record.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - LDS ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <figure id="edit-pers-as-fig">
 | 
						|
                <title>Edit Person dialog - Associations</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <screenshot>
 | 
						|
                  <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                    <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                      <imagedata depth=""
 | 
						|
                                 fileref="figures/edit-person-assoc.png"
 | 
						|
                                 format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
                    </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <textobject>
 | 
						|
                      <phrase>Shows Associations Tab of Edit Person
 | 
						|
                      dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                    </textobject>
 | 
						|
                  </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                </screenshot>
 | 
						|
              </figure>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>LDS</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>LDS</guilabel> (Latter Days Saints) tab lets
 | 
						|
              you view and edit information about LDS ordinances of the
 | 
						|
              person. These are LDS Baptism, Endowment, and Sealed to Parents
 | 
						|
              ordinances, as labeled inside the tab. Each ordinance is
 | 
						|
              described by its date, LDS temple, and Place where it happened.
 | 
						|
              An additional pop-up menu, "Parents," is available for the
 | 
						|
              Sealed to Parents ordinance. Each ordinance can be further
 | 
						|
              described through the selections available in the Status pop-up
 | 
						|
              menu. It can also be include notes and references to sources
 | 
						|
              through the corresponding <guibutton>Sources...</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Note</guibutton> buttons.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Person dialog - LDS ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <figure id="edit-pers-lds-fig">
 | 
						|
                <title>Edit Person dialog - LDS</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <screenshot>
 | 
						|
                  <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                    <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                      <imagedata depth=""
 | 
						|
                                 fileref="figures/edit-person-lds.png"
 | 
						|
                                 format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
                    </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <textobject>
 | 
						|
                      <phrase>Shows LDS Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                    </textobject>
 | 
						|
                  </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                </screenshot>
 | 
						|
              </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="adv-dates">
 | 
						|
        <title>Editing Dates</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>This section describes how to enter and modify dates. Since
 | 
						|
        dates are so important in genealogical research, GRAMPS takes special
 | 
						|
        care to preserve and use any date information available.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Information can be entered into a date field by directly typing
 | 
						|
        it or by invoking the Date selection dialog. Both methods will be
 | 
						|
        discussed below, but first, we will cover some important features of
 | 
						|
        dates as they are used in GRAMPS.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <sect3 id="adv-dates-types">
 | 
						|
          <title>Date types</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Dates in GRAMPS are classified according to the following
 | 
						|
          types:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <variablelist>
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Regular</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>A "regular" date is one which includes a specific day,
 | 
						|
                date, or month. It can be complete (e.g., June 6, 1990) or
 | 
						|
                partial (e.g., July 1977).</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Before</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>A "before" date is one that can only be identified as
 | 
						|
                occurring before a certain day, month, or year.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>After</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>An "after" date is one that occurs after a certain day,
 | 
						|
                month, or year.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Range</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>A "range" describes a time period during which the event
 | 
						|
                occurred. For example, "between January 1932 and March
 | 
						|
                1932."</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Span</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>A "span" describes a time period during which a
 | 
						|
                condition existed. For example, "from May 12, 2000 to February
 | 
						|
                2, 2002."</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          </variablelist>
 | 
						|
        </sect3>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <sect3 id="adv-dates-parsing">
 | 
						|
          <title>Date formats and parsing rules</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>GRAMPS recognizes dates entered in a variety of formats. The
 | 
						|
          default numeric format is that which is conventional for the
 | 
						|
          environment is which GRAMPS is operating; that is, DD.MM.YYYY for
 | 
						|
          most European countries, MM/DD/YYYY for the U.S., and so on.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Besides exact dates, GRAMPS recognizes many dates that are not
 | 
						|
          regular: before, after, about, ranges and spans. It also understands
 | 
						|
          the quality: estimated or calculated. Finally, it supports partial
 | 
						|
          dates and many alternative calendars. Below is the list of date
 | 
						|
          entry rules to allow precise date parsing.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <note>
 | 
						|
            <title>Date parsing rules</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>The list only applys to the English version of GRAMPS. If
 | 
						|
            you are using localized version of GRAMPS, your version may or may
 | 
						|
            not provide a localized date parser. At the time of this writing,
 | 
						|
            localized parsers exist for French, German, Russian, Finnish,
 | 
						|
            Dutch and Spanish languages.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>If the localized parser is available for your version,
 | 
						|
            chances are that other rules are in effect. If there is no manual
 | 
						|
            in your language yet, you may try following your instinct and go
 | 
						|
            with the common ways of denoting dates in your language. If all
 | 
						|
            else fails, use the <guilabel>Date selection</guilabel> dialog
 | 
						|
            described below.</para>
 | 
						|
          </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Regular single dates can be entered just as you would
 | 
						|
              write them. Examples: May 24, 1961 or January 1, 2004.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Dates that are not regular should start with the quality:
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>estimated</guilabel> or
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>calculated</guilabel>, if applicable. Example: est.
 | 
						|
              1961, or calc 2005. (Note that a quality does not need to be
 | 
						|
              specified for regular dates.)</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>After the quality should appear the type. If the type is
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>before</guilabel>, <guilabel>after</guilabel>, or
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>about</guilabel>, you scan specify the type by writing
 | 
						|
              "before", "after" or "about". If the type is a range, write
 | 
						|
              "between DATE and DATE", and if the type is a span, write "from
 | 
						|
              DATE to DATE". patterns, where DATE is a single date.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>Examples: est from 2001 to 2003, before June 1975, est
 | 
						|
              about 2000, calc between May 1900 and January 1, 1990.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Partial dates are entered simply by omitting unknown
 | 
						|
              information. Examples: May 1961 and 2004.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Alternate calendars are calendars other than the Gregorian
 | 
						|
              calendar. Currently, GRAMPS supports Hebrew, French Republican,
 | 
						|
              Julian, Islamic, and Persian alternate calendars. To specify the
 | 
						|
              calendar other than the default Gregorian, append the name of
 | 
						|
              the calendar to the date string, e.g. "January 9, 1905
 | 
						|
              (julian)".</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
        </sect3>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <sect3 id="adv-dates-led">
 | 
						|
          <title>Date Validity Indicators</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>GRAMPS uses color circles to indicate the validity of the
 | 
						|
          entered date.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <tip>
 | 
						|
            <title>Date LED buttons</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>The color circles are also referred to as the LED buttons.
 | 
						|
            Clicking on an LED button will invoke the <guilabel>Date
 | 
						|
            selection</guilabel> dialog described in detail below, see <xref
 | 
						|
            linkend="adv-dates-gui" /></para>
 | 
						|
          </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>A green circle means that the date is valid and complete
 | 
						|
              regular date (e.g. May 24, 1961). In simple terms, green means
 | 
						|
              that the date corresponds to a unique date.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Yellow circle means that the date is valid but is not a
 | 
						|
              regular date. This could be the date of a different type: a
 | 
						|
              before date (before May 25, 1962), an after date (after May,
 | 
						|
              1960), an about date (about May 23, 1961), a range (between May
 | 
						|
              1, 1961 and May 31, 1961), or a span (from May 1, 1961 to May
 | 
						|
              31, 1961). It can also be a complete single date, but with
 | 
						|
              quality of Estimated or Calculated. Finally, it could be a
 | 
						|
              partial date, i.e. a regular quality single date missing some
 | 
						|
              portion, e.g. May 1961 or 1961.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>While partial dates do not uniquely define the day, they
 | 
						|
              allow at least for some type of comparisons between the
 | 
						|
              dates.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Red circle means that the date is not recognized as a
 | 
						|
              valid date (e.g. "Christmas week of 61", or "the summer when I
 | 
						|
              had surgery"). In such a case the date will be stored as a text
 | 
						|
              string and therefore cannot be compared other dates. As you can
 | 
						|
              see, it is best to avoid such date entries. It would be better,
 | 
						|
              for example, to enter a date of "December 1961" and then to add
 | 
						|
              the note "Christmas week of '61."</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
        </sect3>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <sect3 id="adv-dates-gui">
 | 
						|
          <title>Graphical User Interface for Entering Dates</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>While the above parsing rules provide a guide for you to type
 | 
						|
          in most common dates, you can also use <guilabel>Date
 | 
						|
          selection</guilabel> dialog. The dialog is particularly useful for
 | 
						|
          building a complex date or for simply insuring that your information
 | 
						|
          is entered in a way GRAMPS will understand. The <guilabel>Date
 | 
						|
          selection</guilabel> dialog can be invoked by clicking the colored
 | 
						|
          circle button next to the date entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== Figure: Date selection dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para><figure id="adv-dates-gui-fig">
 | 
						|
              <title>Date selection dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <screenshot>
 | 
						|
                <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                  <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                    <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/date-selection.png"
 | 
						|
                               format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
                  </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <textobject>
 | 
						|
                    <phrase>Shows Date selection dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                  </textobject>
 | 
						|
                </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              </screenshot>
 | 
						|
            </figure></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>The <guilabel>Calendar</guilabel> menu lets you choose a
 | 
						|
          calendar other than the default Gregorian. The
 | 
						|
          <guilabel>Quality</guilabel> menu gives you the choices of Regular,
 | 
						|
          Estimated, or Calculated. The <guilabel>Type</guilabel> menu allows
 | 
						|
          you establish the exact date type: Regular, Before, After, About,
 | 
						|
          Range, Span, and Text only. You can set the
 | 
						|
          <guilabel>Date</guilabel> by setting the day, the month, and the
 | 
						|
          year. In the event that your date type is Range or Span, the
 | 
						|
          <guilabel>Second date</guilabel> will be activated. Finally, the
 | 
						|
          <guilabel>Text comment</guilabel> text entry field allows storing an
 | 
						|
          arbitrary text string along with the date.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <note>
 | 
						|
            <para>If you have an important comment to make about a date, you
 | 
						|
            are better off doing so in a Note that corresponds to the event
 | 
						|
            than in the Text comment field of the Date selection dialog. We
 | 
						|
            recommend this for the following reason: If you enter a date by
 | 
						|
            typing it directly into the date field (that is, not via the Date
 | 
						|
            selector dialog), your entry will be copied and stored as the text
 | 
						|
            comment string when GRAMPS parses the entered text. Thus, any
 | 
						|
            comment that may have been there prior to the parsing will be
 | 
						|
            overwritten.</para>
 | 
						|
          </note>
 | 
						|
        </sect3>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="adv-rel">
 | 
						|
        <title>Editing Information About Relationships</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Information about relationships is entered and edited through
 | 
						|
        the <guilabel>Marriage/Relationship Editor</guilabel> dialog. This
 | 
						|
        dialog is invoked from Family View by double-clicking the Spouse
 | 
						|
        box</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <note>
 | 
						|
          <para>You can also invoke this dialog by right-clicking inside the
 | 
						|
          Spouse box and selecting "Edit relationship" item from the context
 | 
						|
          menu that pops up.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Relationship dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="edit-rel-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Marriage/Relationship Editor dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/edit-rel.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Marriage/Relationship Editor dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The top of the window shows the names of the people whose
 | 
						|
        relationship is being edited. The main part of the window displays
 | 
						|
        seven notebook tabs representing different categories of information
 | 
						|
        about the relationship. Click any tab to view or edit the information
 | 
						|
        it contains. The bottom part has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time will apply all the
 | 
						|
        changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time will close the window
 | 
						|
        without applying any changes. If any of the data in any tab is
 | 
						|
        modified, an alert window will appear that will prompt you choose
 | 
						|
        between closing the dialog without saving changes, canceling the
 | 
						|
        initial cancel request, or saving the changes.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <note>
 | 
						|
          <para>Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
 | 
						|
          changes to the database. This version of GRAMPS does not have a
 | 
						|
          separate saving function, all changes are immediate.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
 | 
						|
          data. If not, it has no data.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The tabs provide the following information categories of
 | 
						|
        relationship data:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>General</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you edit the
 | 
						|
              Relationship type. The available types (such as Married,
 | 
						|
              Unmarried, etc.) can be chosen from the drop-down
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Relationship type</guilabel> menu. The
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>GRAMPS ID</guilabel> field displays the ID number
 | 
						|
              which labels this relationship in the database. The
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Last changed</guilabel> label shows the last time the
 | 
						|
              relationship was modified. Finally, the Information is complete
 | 
						|
              check button indicates whether the record of this relationship
 | 
						|
              is complete or not.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Events</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit
 | 
						|
              events relevant to the relationship. The bottom part displays
 | 
						|
              the list of all such events stored in the database. The top part
 | 
						|
              shows the details of the currently selected event in the list
 | 
						|
              (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
 | 
						|
              you add, modify, or remove an event record from the database.
 | 
						|
              Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an
 | 
						|
              event is selected from the list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Attributes</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab lets you view and
 | 
						|
              edit particular information about the relationship that can be
 | 
						|
              expressed as attributes. The bottom part displays the list of
 | 
						|
              all such attributes stored in the database. The top part shows
 | 
						|
              the details of the currently selected attribute in the list (if
 | 
						|
              any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
 | 
						|
              you add, modify, or remove an attribute. Note that the
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons
 | 
						|
              become available only when an attribute is selected from the
 | 
						|
              list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Notes</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Notes</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit
 | 
						|
              notes associated with the relationship. These could be any
 | 
						|
              comments which do not naturally fit into the "Parameter-Value"
 | 
						|
              pairs available to Attributes. To add a note or modify existing
 | 
						|
              notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option lets you set the
 | 
						|
              way the note will appear in reports and web pages. If you select
 | 
						|
              Flowed, the text generated will have single spaces put in place
 | 
						|
              of all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters.
 | 
						|
              A blank line inserted between two blocks of text will signal a
 | 
						|
              new paragraph; additional inserted lines will be ignored.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>If you select the Preformatted option, the text in reports
 | 
						|
              and web pages will appear exactly as you enter it in the Notes
 | 
						|
              dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Sources</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab lets you view and
 | 
						|
              edit the sources which provide evidence for the relationship.
 | 
						|
              These might be documents that refer to the relationship, but
 | 
						|
              which do not necessarily document it officially. For example, if
 | 
						|
              Aunt Martha's memoirs mention that her great-grandson Paul was
 | 
						|
              married, the researcher may take this as evidence of the
 | 
						|
              relationship between Paul and his wife existed and cite the
 | 
						|
              memoirs as the source for this assumption.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <note>
 | 
						|
                <para>Sources that document specific events such as marriages
 | 
						|
                or divorces are better filed in relation to those events,
 | 
						|
                under the Events tab.</para>
 | 
						|
              </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The central part of the Sources window displays the list
 | 
						|
              of all source references associated with the relationship. The
 | 
						|
              buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow let you add, modify, and
 | 
						|
              remove a source reference to this relationship. Note that the
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons
 | 
						|
              become available only when a source reference is selected from
 | 
						|
              the list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Gallery</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you store and
 | 
						|
              display photos and other media objects associated with the
 | 
						|
              relationship. The central part of the window lists all such
 | 
						|
              objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image files. Other
 | 
						|
              objects such as audio files, movie files, etc., are represented
 | 
						|
              by a generic GRAMPS icon. The buttons <guilabel>+</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Select</guilabel>, <guilabel>Edit</guilabel>, and
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>-</guilabel> let you add a new image, add a reference
 | 
						|
              to an existing image, modify an existing image, and remove a
 | 
						|
              media object's link to the relationship. Note that the
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> and <guilabel>-</guilabel> buttons
 | 
						|
              become available only when a media object is selected from the
 | 
						|
              list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>LDS</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>LDS</guilabel> (Latter Days Saints) tab
 | 
						|
              displays information about the LDS <guilabel>Sealed to
 | 
						|
              Spouse</guilabel> ordinance. The data can include date, LDS
 | 
						|
              temple, and Place. The status of the ordinance can be described
 | 
						|
              through the selections available in the
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Status</guilabel> pop-up menu and can also be
 | 
						|
              referenced in the corresponding
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Sources...</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Note</guibutton> buttons.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="adv-src">
 | 
						|
        <title>Editing Information About Sources</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To edit source data, switch to the Sources View and select the
 | 
						|
        desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click that entry or click
 | 
						|
        the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the toolbar to invoke the
 | 
						|
        following <guilabel>Source Editor</guilabel> dialog:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Source Editor dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="edit-src-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Source Editor dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/edit-src.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Source Editor dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The main part of the window displays four notebook tabs
 | 
						|
        containing different categories of information. Click a tab to view or
 | 
						|
        edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons.
 | 
						|
        Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the changes made in
 | 
						|
        all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without
 | 
						|
        applying any changes.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <note>
 | 
						|
          <para>Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
 | 
						|
          changes to the database (write on disk). All changes are
 | 
						|
          immediate.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
 | 
						|
          data. If not, it has no data.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The general information at the top of the window lets you define
 | 
						|
        basic information about the source: its <guilabel>Title</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Author</guilabel>, <guilabel>Abbreviation</guilabel>, and
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Publication information</guilabel>. You can type this
 | 
						|
        information directly into the adjacent fields.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The tabs provide the following information categories of source
 | 
						|
        data:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Note</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab provides a place to
 | 
						|
              record various information about the source that does not fit
 | 
						|
              neatly into other categories. To add a note or modify existing
 | 
						|
              notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Gallery</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you store and
 | 
						|
              display photos and other media objects associated with a given
 | 
						|
              source (for example, a photo of a birth certificate). The
 | 
						|
              central part of the window lists all such media objects and
 | 
						|
              gives you a thumbnail preview of image files. Other objects such
 | 
						|
              as audio files, movie files, etc., are represented by a generic
 | 
						|
              GRAMPS icon. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Select</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add a new image, add a
 | 
						|
              reference to an existing image, modify an existing image, and
 | 
						|
              remove a media object's link to the source. Note that the
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons
 | 
						|
              become available only when a media object is selected from the
 | 
						|
              list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Data</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Data</guilabel> tab displays "Key/Value"
 | 
						|
              pairs that may be associated with the source. These are similar
 | 
						|
              to the "Attributes" used for other types of GRAMPS records. The
 | 
						|
              difference between these Key/Value pairs and Attributes is that
 | 
						|
              Attributes may have source references and notes, while Key/Value
 | 
						|
              data may not.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The central part of the window lists all existing
 | 
						|
              Key/Value pairs. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add and remove pairs. To modify
 | 
						|
              the text of Key or Value, first select the desired entry. Then
 | 
						|
              click in either the Key or Value cell of that entry and type
 | 
						|
              your text. When you are done, click outside the cell to exit
 | 
						|
              editing mode.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Repositories</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Repositories</guilabel> tab displays the
 | 
						|
              references to the repositories in which the source is contained.
 | 
						|
              The list can be ordered by any of its column headings:
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, <guilabel>Title</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Call Number</guilabel>,and <guilabel>Type</guilabel>.
 | 
						|
              Double-clicking an entry allows you to view and edit the record.
 | 
						|
              You may also edit the reference. The buttons on the side of the
 | 
						|
              tab allow you add a new repository, link to (or share) an
 | 
						|
              existing repository, edit the reference to the repository, or
 | 
						|
              remove the reference.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>References</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab lists all the
 | 
						|
              database records that refer to this source, if any. The list can
 | 
						|
              be ordered by any of its column headings:
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, or
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Name</guilabel>. Double-clicking an entry allows you
 | 
						|
              to view and edit the record.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <note>
 | 
						|
                <para>Only primary objects can be shown in the
 | 
						|
                <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab: Person, Family, Event,
 | 
						|
                Place, or Media object. Secondary objects such as Names and
 | 
						|
                Attributes can only be accessed through the primary objects to
 | 
						|
                which they belong.</para>
 | 
						|
              </note>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="adv-plc">
 | 
						|
        <title>Editing Information About Places</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To edit information about places, switch to the Places View and
 | 
						|
        select the desired entry from the list of places. Double-click that
 | 
						|
        entry or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the toolbar
 | 
						|
        to bring up the following <guilabel>Place Editor</guilabel>
 | 
						|
        dialog:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Place Editor dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="edit-plc-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Place Editor dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/edit-plc.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Place Editor dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The main part of the window displays seven notebook tabs
 | 
						|
        containing different categories of information. Click a tab to view or
 | 
						|
        edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons.
 | 
						|
        Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the changes made in
 | 
						|
        all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without
 | 
						|
        applying any changes.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <note>
 | 
						|
          <para>Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
 | 
						|
          changes to the database). All changes are immediate.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>If a tab label is in boldface type and displays an icon, this
 | 
						|
          means it contains data. If not, it has no data.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The tabs represent following categories of place data:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>General</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab you view and edit the
 | 
						|
              basic information about the place: the
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Title</guilabel> which labels it in the database,
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>City</guilabel>, <guilabel>Church parish</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>County</guilabel>, <guilabel>State</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Country</guilabel>, <guilabel>Longitude</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
              and <guilabel>Latitude</guilabel>. You can type this information
 | 
						|
              directly into the adjacent fields.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Other names</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Other names</guilabel> tab lets you view and
 | 
						|
              edit other names by which the place might be known. The bottom
 | 
						|
              part of the window lists all other names of the place stored in
 | 
						|
              the database. The top part of the window shows the details of
 | 
						|
              the currently selected name in the list (if any). The buttons
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, and remove a name
 | 
						|
              record. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a
 | 
						|
              name is selected from the list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Note</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any comments or
 | 
						|
              notes concerning the place. To add a note or modify existing
 | 
						|
              notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>Sources</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab lets you view and
 | 
						|
              edit sources relevant to a place. The central part of the window
 | 
						|
              lists all such source references stored in the database. The
 | 
						|
              buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, and remove a
 | 
						|
              source reference associated with a place. Note that the
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons
 | 
						|
              become available only when a source reference is selected from
 | 
						|
              the list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Gallery</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you store and
 | 
						|
              display photos and other media objects associated with a given
 | 
						|
              place. The central part of the window lists all such media
 | 
						|
              objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image files. Other
 | 
						|
              objects such as audio files, movie files, etc., are represented
 | 
						|
              by a generic GRAMPS icon. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Select</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add a new image, add a
 | 
						|
              reference to an existing image, modify an existing image, and
 | 
						|
              remove a media object's link to the place. Note that the
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons
 | 
						|
              become available only when a media object is selected from the
 | 
						|
              list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Internet</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Internet</guilabel> tab contains Internet
 | 
						|
              addresses relevant to the place. The bottom part of the window
 | 
						|
              lists all such Internet addresses stored in the database. The
 | 
						|
              top part shows the details of the currently selected address in
 | 
						|
              the list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
 | 
						|
              you add, modify, and remove an Internet address. The
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Go</guibutton> button (represented by an icon with a
 | 
						|
              green arrow and yellow circle) opens your browser and takes you
 | 
						|
              to the web page corresponding to the highlighted Internet
 | 
						|
              address. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton>, and <guibutton>Go</guibutton> buttons
 | 
						|
              become available only when an address is selected from the
 | 
						|
              list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>References</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab indicates any
 | 
						|
              database records (events or LDS ordinances) that refer to a
 | 
						|
              place. This information cannot be modified from the Place Editor
 | 
						|
              dialog. Instead, the corresponding database record (e.g., a
 | 
						|
              birth event) has to be brought up and its place reference
 | 
						|
              edited.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="adv-media">
 | 
						|
        <title>Editing Information About Media Objects</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To edit media data, switch to the Media View and select the
 | 
						|
        desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click on that entry or
 | 
						|
        click <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> on the toolbar to invoke the
 | 
						|
        following <guilabel>Media Properties Editor</guilabel> dialog:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Media Properties dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="edit-media-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Media Properties Editor dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/edit-media.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Media Properties Editor dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>A thumbnail preview of the object is presented, along with a
 | 
						|
        summary of its properties (ID, path, and object type). The central
 | 
						|
        part of the window displays five notebook tabs containing different
 | 
						|
        categories of information. Click a tab to view or edit its contents.
 | 
						|
        The bottom part of the window has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the changes made in all tabs
 | 
						|
        and close the dialog window. Clicking the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without
 | 
						|
        applying any changes.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <note>
 | 
						|
          <para>Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
 | 
						|
          changes to the database (write on disk). All changes are
 | 
						|
          immediate.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
 | 
						|
          data. If not, it has no data.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The tabs represent the following categories of media
 | 
						|
        data:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>General</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you view and
 | 
						|
              edit the object's Title and Date. You can type this information
 | 
						|
              directly into the corresponding fields. For the Date, you can
 | 
						|
              also enter information by clicking the LED button and invoking
 | 
						|
              the <guilabel>Date selection</guilabel> dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <note>
 | 
						|
                <para>Every media object is referred to by its Path. The user
 | 
						|
                is responsible for keeping track of the object files. GRAMPS
 | 
						|
                will only reference and display the contents, not manage the
 | 
						|
                files themselves.</para>
 | 
						|
              </note>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Attributes</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab lets you view and
 | 
						|
              edit particular information about the media object that can be
 | 
						|
              expressed as Attributes. The bottom part displays the list of
 | 
						|
              all such attributes stored in the database. The top part shows
 | 
						|
              the details of the currently selected attribute in the list (if
 | 
						|
              any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
 | 
						|
              you add, modify, or remove an attribute. Note that the
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons
 | 
						|
              become available only when an attribute is selected from the
 | 
						|
              list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Notes</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab provides a place to
 | 
						|
              record various information about the source that does not fit
 | 
						|
              neatly into other categories. This area is particularly useful
 | 
						|
              for recording information that does not naturally fit into the
 | 
						|
              "Parameter/Value" pairs available to Attributes. To add a note
 | 
						|
              or modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
 | 
						|
              field.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>References</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab indicates any
 | 
						|
              database records that refer to a given media object. The list
 | 
						|
              can be ordered according to any of its column headings:
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, or
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Name</guilabel>. Double-clicking an entry allows you
 | 
						|
              to view and edit the corresponding record.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <note>
 | 
						|
                <para>Only primary objects can be shown in the
 | 
						|
                <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab: Person, Family, Event,
 | 
						|
                Source, or Place. The secondary objects such as Names and
 | 
						|
                Attributes, although able to refer the media object, will only
 | 
						|
                show up through their primary objects to which they
 | 
						|
                belong.</para>
 | 
						|
              </note>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="adv-ev">
 | 
						|
        <title>Editing Information About Events</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Events are edited through the <guilabel>Event Editor</guilabel>
 | 
						|
        dialog. This dialog can be accessed from either the <guilabel>Edit
 | 
						|
        Person</guilabel> dialog or the
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Marriage/Relationship</guilabel> dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Event Editor dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="edit-ev-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Event Editor dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/edit-ev.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Event Editor dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The central part of the window displays five notebook tabs
 | 
						|
        containing different categories of information. Click a tab to view or
 | 
						|
        edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons.
 | 
						|
        Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the changes made in
 | 
						|
        all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without
 | 
						|
        applying any changes.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
 | 
						|
          data. If not, it has no data.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The tabs provide the following information categories of the
 | 
						|
        event data:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>General</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you view and
 | 
						|
              edit basic information about the event: its
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>Date</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Place</guilabel>, <guilabel>Cause</guilabel>, and
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Description</guilabel>. You can type this information
 | 
						|
              directly into the adjacent fields. The type can be selected from
 | 
						|
              available types listed in the Event type drop-down menu. The
 | 
						|
              rest of the information can be typed in the appropriate text
 | 
						|
              entry fields. Checking the Private record box marks the event
 | 
						|
              record as private and allows it to be omitted from
 | 
						|
              reports.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Sources</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab lets you view and
 | 
						|
              edit sources relevant to an event. The central part of the
 | 
						|
              window lists all such source references stored in the database.
 | 
						|
              The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
 | 
						|
              you add, modify, and remove a source reference associated with a
 | 
						|
              place. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a
 | 
						|
              source reference is selected from the list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Note</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab provides a place to
 | 
						|
              record notes or comments about the event. To add a note or
 | 
						|
              modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
 | 
						|
              field.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- END OF EDIT -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="adv-si">
 | 
						|
        <title>Editing Source References</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Source references connect a Source to another object and allow
 | 
						|
        you to provide additional information about the source. When adding
 | 
						|
        source references to events, places, etc., the following dialog
 | 
						|
        appears:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Source Information dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="edit-si-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Source Information dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/edit-si.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Source Information dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The dialog includes two main headings, <guilabel>Source
 | 
						|
        selection</guilabel> and <guilabel>Source details</guilabel>.
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Source selection</guilabel> displays the
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Title</guilabel> of the Source, its
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Author</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Publication
 | 
						|
        information</guilabel>. The <guilabel>Title</guilabel> can be selected
 | 
						|
        from the available sources listed in the drop-down menu. If the source
 | 
						|
        you are referencing is not already in the database, you can enter it
 | 
						|
        by clicking <guibutton>New...</guibutton> and filling out the invoked
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Source Editor</guilabel> dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The <guilabel>Source details</guilabel> section indicates the
 | 
						|
        details associated with the particular reference to this Source:
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Confidence</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Volume/Film/Page</guilabel>, <guilabel>Date</guilabel>,
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Text</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Comments</guilabel>. You can
 | 
						|
        choose the Confidence level from the <guilabel>Confidence</guilabel>
 | 
						|
        drop-down menu. The remaining details can be typed in the
 | 
						|
        corresponding text entry fields.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>Information in this dialog is specific to the particular
 | 
						|
          reference. A single source can be referenced many times, and all
 | 
						|
          such references will have in common the overall source information.
 | 
						|
          This dialog lets you provide reference-specific data, such as
 | 
						|
          relevant quotes, comments, confidence, page numbers, etc., to
 | 
						|
          further specify and document the reference.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="adv-an">
 | 
						|
        <title>Names</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Names are edited through the following <guilabel>Name
 | 
						|
        Editor</guilabel> dialog:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Names Editor dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="edit-an-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Name Editor dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/edit-an.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Name Editor dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The top of the window shows the dialog title including the name
 | 
						|
        of the person whose name is being edited. The central part of the
 | 
						|
        window displays three notebook tabs containing different categories of
 | 
						|
        available information. You can bring any tab to the top for viewing or
 | 
						|
        editing by clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part
 | 
						|
        has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
 | 
						|
        buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time
 | 
						|
        will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
 | 
						|
        window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time
 | 
						|
        will close the window without applying any changes.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
 | 
						|
          information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
 | 
						|
          boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears regular (not
 | 
						|
          bold).</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The tabs provide the following information categories of the
 | 
						|
        name data:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>General</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
 | 
						|
              general information about the name: given name, family name,
 | 
						|
              patronymic (a form of father's name used in some languages, e.g.
 | 
						|
              Russian), family prefix, suffix, title, and type of the name.
 | 
						|
              The information can be typed in the appropriate text entry
 | 
						|
              fields. The family name and the type can be also selected from
 | 
						|
              available choices listed in the appropriate drop-down
 | 
						|
              menus.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para><guilabel>Options</guilabel> allow you to adjust specific
 | 
						|
              grouping, sorting, and displaying properties of this name, as
 | 
						|
              well as to provide the date corresponding to the name. The
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Grouping</guilabel> field provides an alternative
 | 
						|
              grouping node for a given name, overriding the default grouping
 | 
						|
              based on the family name. This may be necessary with similar
 | 
						|
              family names that need to be grouped together -- for example
 | 
						|
              Russian names Ivanov and Ivanova are considered the same, but
 | 
						|
              difference in gender is reflected in different spelling. To
 | 
						|
              enable typing into this field, check the
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Override</guilabel> check button. The <guilabel>Sort
 | 
						|
              as</guilabel> and <guilabel>Display as</guilabel> determine the
 | 
						|
              manner in which the name appears in the People View and in the
 | 
						|
              reports. The <guilabel>Date</guilabel> can provide information
 | 
						|
              on the validity of this name -- use spans as necessary. Check
 | 
						|
              the <guilabel>Private record</guilabel> box to mark this name
 | 
						|
              record as private. This will give you a chance to omit this name
 | 
						|
              from being included in reports, if you choose so among the
 | 
						|
              report generation options.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>Sources</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays information
 | 
						|
              about sources relevant to this name and controls allowing its
 | 
						|
              modification. The central part displays the list of all such
 | 
						|
              sources' references stored in the database. The buttons
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add,
 | 
						|
              modify, and remove a source reference to this name. Note that
 | 
						|
              the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
 | 
						|
              buttons become available only when a source reference is
 | 
						|
              selected from the list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>Note</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
 | 
						|
              concerning the name. To add a note or modify existing notes
 | 
						|
              simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
 | 
						|
              the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in reports and
 | 
						|
              web pages). Selecting <guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace
 | 
						|
              all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters
 | 
						|
              with single space in the output. The two consecutive new lines
 | 
						|
              (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph. Selecting
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor all multiple spaces
 | 
						|
              tabs, and new lines, so that the output will appear as it is
 | 
						|
              entered into the text entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="adv-at">
 | 
						|
        <title>Attributes</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Attributes are edited through the following <guilabel>Attribute
 | 
						|
        Editor</guilabel> dialog:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Attribute Editor dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="edit-at-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Attribute Editor dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/edit-at.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Attribute Editor dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The top of the window shows the dialog title including the name
 | 
						|
        of the person whose attribute is being edited. The central part of the
 | 
						|
        window displays three notebook tabs containing different categories of
 | 
						|
        available information. You can bring any tab to the top for viewing or
 | 
						|
        editing by clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part
 | 
						|
        has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
 | 
						|
        buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time
 | 
						|
        will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
 | 
						|
        window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time
 | 
						|
        will close the window without applying any changes.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
 | 
						|
          information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
 | 
						|
          boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears regular (not
 | 
						|
          bold).</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The tabs provide the following information categories of the
 | 
						|
        attribute data:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>General</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of the
 | 
						|
              most general information about the attribute: name of the
 | 
						|
              attribute and its value. The information can be typed in the
 | 
						|
              appropriate text entry fields. The attribute name can also be
 | 
						|
              selected from available choices (if any) listed in the
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Attribute </guilabel> drop-down menu. Check the
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Private record</guilabel> box to mark this attribute
 | 
						|
              record as private. This will give you a chance to omit this
 | 
						|
              attribute from being included in the reports, if you choose so
 | 
						|
              among the report generation options.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>Sources</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays information
 | 
						|
              about sources relevant to this attribute and controls allowing
 | 
						|
              its modification. The central part displays the list of all such
 | 
						|
              sources references stored in the database. The buttons
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add,
 | 
						|
              modify, and remove a source reference to this attribute. Note
 | 
						|
              that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a
 | 
						|
              source reference is selected from the list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>Note</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
 | 
						|
              concerning the attribute. To add a note or modify existing notes
 | 
						|
              simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
 | 
						|
              the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in reports and
 | 
						|
              web pages). Selecting <guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace
 | 
						|
              all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters
 | 
						|
              with single space in the output. The two consecutive new lines
 | 
						|
              (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph. Selecting
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor all multiple spaces
 | 
						|
              tabs, and new lines, so that the output will appear as it is
 | 
						|
              entered into the text entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="adv-ad">
 | 
						|
        <title>Addresses</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Addresses are edited through the following <guilabel>Address
 | 
						|
        Editor</guilabel> dialog:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Address Editor dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="edit-ad-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Address Editor dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="" fileref="figures/edit-ad.png" format="PNG"
 | 
						|
                           width="" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Address Editor dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The top of the window shows the dialog title including the name
 | 
						|
        of the person whose address is being edited. The central part of the
 | 
						|
        window displays three notebook tabs containing different categories of
 | 
						|
        available information. You can bring any tab to the top for viewing or
 | 
						|
        editing by clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part
 | 
						|
        has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
 | 
						|
        buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time
 | 
						|
        will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
 | 
						|
        window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time
 | 
						|
        will close the window without applying any changes.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
 | 
						|
          information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
 | 
						|
          boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears regular (not
 | 
						|
          bold).</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The tabs provide the following information categories of the
 | 
						|
        address data:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>General</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of the
 | 
						|
              most general information about the address: date, street
 | 
						|
              address, city or county, state or province, country, the postal
 | 
						|
              code, and the phone number. The information can be typed in the
 | 
						|
              appropriate text entry fields. Check the <guilabel>Private
 | 
						|
              record</guilabel> box to mark this address record as private.
 | 
						|
              This will give you a chance to omit this address from being
 | 
						|
              included in reports, if you choose so among the report
 | 
						|
              generation options.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>Sources</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays information
 | 
						|
              about sources relevant to this address and controls allowing its
 | 
						|
              modification. The central part displays the list of all such
 | 
						|
              sources references stored in the database. The buttons
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
 | 
						|
              <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add,
 | 
						|
              modify, and remove a source reference to this address. Note that
 | 
						|
              the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
 | 
						|
              buttons become available only when a source reference is
 | 
						|
              selected from the list.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>Note</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
 | 
						|
              concerning the address. To add a note or modify existing notes
 | 
						|
              simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
 | 
						|
              the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in reports and
 | 
						|
              web pages). Selecting <guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace
 | 
						|
              all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters
 | 
						|
              with single space in the output. The two consecutive new lines
 | 
						|
              (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph. Selecting
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor all multiple spaces
 | 
						|
              tabs, and new lines, so that the output will appear as it is
 | 
						|
              entered into the text entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="adv-merge">
 | 
						|
        <title>Merging records</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Sometime several records in the database turn out to be
 | 
						|
        describing the same object: same person, same place, or same source.
 | 
						|
        It could happen either when the data is entered twice by mistake, or
 | 
						|
        when new information reveals that the two entries refer to the same
 | 
						|
        person. It can also happen after importing GEDCOM obtained from a
 | 
						|
        relative, whose database overlaps with your existing data.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Whenever you detect duplicate records, merging them a useful way
 | 
						|
        of correcting the situation.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>To make a merge, exactly two records have to be selected in
 | 
						|
          the appropriate view (People View, Sources View, or Places View).
 | 
						|
          This is accomplished by selecting one entry and then selecting
 | 
						|
          another person while holding down <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> key.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <sect3 id="adv-merge-people">
 | 
						|
          <title>Merge People</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>There are two ways of merging personal records:
 | 
						|
          <guilabel>Compare and Merge</guilabel> and <guilabel>Fast
 | 
						|
          Merge</guilabel>, both available from the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
          menu.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <note>
 | 
						|
            <para>Merging people does not discard any information with either
 | 
						|
            method. The decisions you make during the merge only affect which
 | 
						|
            data will become primary and which will become secondary for the
 | 
						|
            resulting merged record.</para>
 | 
						|
          </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <variablelist>
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term><guilabel>Compare and Merge</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>When exactly two people are selected, choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                    <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
                  </menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Compare People</guilabel>
 | 
						|
                dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <!-- ==== Figure: Compare People dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <figure id="comp-people-fig">
 | 
						|
                  <title>Compare People dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <screenshot>
 | 
						|
                    <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                      <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                        <imagedata depth="469"
 | 
						|
                                   fileref="figures/comp-people.png"
 | 
						|
                                   format="PNG" width="500" />
 | 
						|
                      </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                      <textobject>
 | 
						|
                        <phrase>Shows Compare People dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                      </textobject>
 | 
						|
                    </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                  </screenshot>
 | 
						|
                </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or
 | 
						|
                not the selected records should be merged. If you decide that
 | 
						|
                the records should not be merged, despite similar names, you
 | 
						|
                may click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the dialog
 | 
						|
                without making any changes. If you decide to proceed with
 | 
						|
                merging, select the appropriate <guilabel>Select</guilabel>
 | 
						|
                radio button to specify the record to be used as the source of
 | 
						|
                primary data, then click <guibutton>Merge and
 | 
						|
                close</guibutton>.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>The data from the other record will be kept as alternate
 | 
						|
                data. Specifically, all names from the other record will
 | 
						|
                become alternate names of the merged record. Similarly,
 | 
						|
                parents, spouses, and children of the other record will become
 | 
						|
                alternate parents, spouses, and children of the merged record,
 | 
						|
                and so on.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <variablelist>
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term><guilabel>Fast Merge</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>When exactly two people are selected, choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                    <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <guimenuitem>Fast Merge</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
                  </menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Merge People</guilabel>
 | 
						|
                dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <!-- ==== Figure: Compare People dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <figure id="merge-people-fig">
 | 
						|
                  <title>Merge People dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <screenshot>
 | 
						|
                    <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                      <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                        <imagedata depth="245"
 | 
						|
                                   fileref="figures/merge-people.png"
 | 
						|
                                   format="PNG" width="382" />
 | 
						|
                      </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                      <textobject>
 | 
						|
                        <phrase>Shows Merge People dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                      </textobject>
 | 
						|
                    </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                  </screenshot>
 | 
						|
                </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>The dialog allows you to quickly merge two records,
 | 
						|
                specifying the record to be used as the source of primary
 | 
						|
                data. The data from the other record will be kept as alternate
 | 
						|
                data. Specifically, all names from the other record will
 | 
						|
                become alternate names of the merged record. Similarly,
 | 
						|
                parents, spouses, and children of the other record will become
 | 
						|
                alternate parents, spouses, and children of the merged record,
 | 
						|
                and so on.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <tip>
 | 
						|
                  <para>If you are not certain whether or not you need to
 | 
						|
                  merge the records, or which record to specify as the source
 | 
						|
                  of primary data, use <guilabel>Compare and Merge</guilabel>
 | 
						|
                  method described above..</para>
 | 
						|
                </tip>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          </variablelist>
 | 
						|
        </sect3>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <sect3 id="adv-merge-sources">
 | 
						|
          <title>Merge Sources</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>When exactly two sources are selected, choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
              <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
            </menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Merge Sources</guilabel>
 | 
						|
          dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== Figure: Merge Sources dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <figure id="merge-src-fig">
 | 
						|
            <title>Merge Sources dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <screenshot>
 | 
						|
              <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                  <imagedata depth="224" fileref="figures/merge-src.png"
 | 
						|
                             format="PNG" width="500" />
 | 
						|
                </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <textobject>
 | 
						|
                  <phrase>Shows Merge Sources dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                </textobject>
 | 
						|
              </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
            </screenshot>
 | 
						|
          </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not the
 | 
						|
          selected records should be merged. If you decide that the records
 | 
						|
          should not be merged, despite similar titles, you may click
 | 
						|
          <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the dialog without making any
 | 
						|
          changes. If you decide to proceed with merging, choose the
 | 
						|
          appropriate radio button to specify the title, author, abbreviated
 | 
						|
          title, publication information, and the ID to be used for the merged
 | 
						|
          record, then click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
 | 
						|
        </sect3>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <sect3 id="adv-merge-places">
 | 
						|
          <title>Merge Places</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>When exactly two places are selected, choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
              <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
            </menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Select title</guilabel>
 | 
						|
          dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== Figure: Select title dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <figure id="merge-plc-fig">
 | 
						|
            <title>Merge Places dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <screenshot>
 | 
						|
              <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                  <imagedata depth="185" fileref="figures/merge-plc.png"
 | 
						|
                             format="PNG" width="400" />
 | 
						|
                </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <textobject>
 | 
						|
                  <phrase>Shows Select title dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                </textobject>
 | 
						|
              </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
            </screenshot>
 | 
						|
          </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not the
 | 
						|
          selected records should be merged. If you decide that the records
 | 
						|
          should not be merged, despite similar titles, you may click
 | 
						|
          <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the dialog without making any
 | 
						|
          changes. If you decide to proceed with merging, choose the
 | 
						|
          appropriate radio button to specify the title of the merged record,
 | 
						|
          or specify <guilabel>Other</guilabel> and enter new text, then click
 | 
						|
          <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
 | 
						|
        </sect3>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="gramps-nav">
 | 
						|
      <title>Navigation</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>As long as any database is open, GRAMPS is focused on a single
 | 
						|
      person usually referred to as an Active person. This allows you to view
 | 
						|
      or modify the data concerning this person, his or her immediate family,
 | 
						|
      etc. Navigating in the database (i.e. moving from person to person) is
 | 
						|
      in fact nothing else but changing the Active person. This section
 | 
						|
      describes many alternative ways to navigate through the database using
 | 
						|
      both the complex and the convenient interfaces GRAMPS provides. All
 | 
						|
      these ways eventually accomplish the same thing, but some are more
 | 
						|
      convenient than others, depending what you are doing in GRAMPS at the
 | 
						|
      moment.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-nav-people">
 | 
						|
        <title>Using the People View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The most intuitive way to select an active person is to use the
 | 
						|
        People View (see <xref linkend="people-view" />). When in the People
 | 
						|
        View, just select the name of the desired person from the list by
 | 
						|
        clicking that list entry. The person you have selected becomes active.
 | 
						|
        The statusbar updates to reflect the change of the active
 | 
						|
        person.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-nav-family">
 | 
						|
        <title>Using the Family View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>When in the Family View (see <xref
 | 
						|
        linkend="relationships-view" />), you can easily navigate between the
 | 
						|
        members of the displayed family as follows:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>To make the currently selected spouse the active person,
 | 
						|
            click the double-arrow button to the right of the active person
 | 
						|
            box. Alternatively, right-click into the spouse box and select
 | 
						|
            <guilabel>Make the selected spouse an active person</guilabel>
 | 
						|
            item from the context menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>To make the currently selected parents the active family
 | 
						|
            (thereby making father the active person and mother the selected
 | 
						|
            spouse), click the right-arrow button to the right of the active
 | 
						|
            person's parents box. Alternatively, right-click into the active
 | 
						|
            person's parents box and select <guilabel>Make the selected
 | 
						|
            parents the active family</guilabel> item from the context
 | 
						|
            menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>To make the currently selected spouse's parents the active
 | 
						|
            family (thereby making father the active person and mother the
 | 
						|
            selected spouse), click the right-arrow button to the right of the
 | 
						|
            spouse's parents box. Alternatively, right-click into the spouse's
 | 
						|
            parents box and select <guilabel>Make the selected parents the
 | 
						|
            active family</guilabel> item from the context menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>To make the currently selected child the active person,
 | 
						|
            click the left-arrow button to the right of the children box.
 | 
						|
            Alternatively, right-click into the children box and select
 | 
						|
            <guilabel>Make the selected child an active person</guilabel> item
 | 
						|
            from the context menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>In addition to this, GRAMPS provides an extensive set of
 | 
						|
        keyboard navigation options. The detailed reference to the key
 | 
						|
        bindings is found in the <xref linkend="append-keybind" />.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-nav-pedigree">
 | 
						|
        <title>Using the Pedigree View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The Pedigree View (see <xref linkend="pedigree-view" />) also
 | 
						|
        allows you to move along the family tree. The benefit of this method
 | 
						|
        is that you can see more than one generation of the family tree. Also,
 | 
						|
        you can jump directly from a great-grandson to a great-grandfather
 | 
						|
        without going through the intermediate generations.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Note that after changing the active person in the Pedigree View,
 | 
						|
        the display is re-adjusted to show four generations, starting from the
 | 
						|
        newly selected Active person. When in the Pedigree View, you can
 | 
						|
        easily navigate between the members of the displayed family tree as
 | 
						|
        follows:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>To make any displayed person the active person, double-click
 | 
						|
            the line that connects to the left side of the corresponding
 | 
						|
            box.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>To make a child of the currently active person (if any) the
 | 
						|
            active person, click the left arrow button to the left of the
 | 
						|
            corresponding box. If there is more than one child, the button
 | 
						|
            expands to the menu listing the children to choose from.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>To move the whole family tree one generation back, click on
 | 
						|
            the corresponding right arrow button on the right-hand side of the
 | 
						|
            display area. Clicking the upper button will move the tree along
 | 
						|
            the paternal line. Clicking the lower button will move the tree
 | 
						|
            along the maternal line.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>Clicking either of these buttons is completely equivalent to
 | 
						|
            double-clicking the lines connecting to the left of the
 | 
						|
            corresponding boxes for father and mother.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>You can also quickly access any of the spouses, siblings,
 | 
						|
        children, or parents of any displayed person. To do this, move the
 | 
						|
        mouse over the desired person's box and right-click to invoke a
 | 
						|
        context menu. The appropriate menu items will contain submenus listing
 | 
						|
        all spouses, siblings, children, and parents of the corresponding
 | 
						|
        person.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <title>Advantages of using right-click menus</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Direct access to spouse and siblings</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Complete lists of all member of all categories, not only
 | 
						|
              the preferred members.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-nav-default">
 | 
						|
        <title>Setting the Home Person</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>One and only one person in the database can be selected as the
 | 
						|
        Home person. Once the Home person is selected, moving to that person
 | 
						|
        becomes a matter of a single click, regardless of which view you are
 | 
						|
        using at the moment.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To set the Home person, first navigate to that person using any
 | 
						|
        method you like. Then choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
            <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <guimenuitem>Set Home person</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
          </menuchoice>. Once this is done, you can move to the Home person
 | 
						|
        from anywhere in the database by simply clicking the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Home</guibutton> icon on the toolbar. You can also choose
 | 
						|
        <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
            <guimenu>Go</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <guimenuitem>Home</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
          </menuchoice> from the menu or select <guilabel>Home</guilabel> item
 | 
						|
        from any context menu available on the right click.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-nav-history">
 | 
						|
        <title>Using history-based tools</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>GRAMPS also features a powerful set of history-based navigation
 | 
						|
        tools. These tools are similar to those commonly used in web browsers.
 | 
						|
        They include <guilabel>Back</guilabel> and
 | 
						|
        <guilabel>Forward</guilabel> items available from the <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
            <guimenu>Go</guimenu>
 | 
						|
          </menuchoice> menu, context menus (available in People, Family, and
 | 
						|
        Pedigree views), and the toolbar buttons. They also include the list
 | 
						|
        of the recent selections available under the <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
            <guimenu>Go</guimenu>
 | 
						|
          </menuchoice> menu that allows you to jump directly to any of the
 | 
						|
        recent selections. Finally, right-clicking on the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Back</guibutton> and <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> toolbar
 | 
						|
        buttons invokes the popup menu with corresponding portion of the
 | 
						|
        history. Select any item from the menu to jump directly to it.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-nav-bookmk">
 | 
						|
        <title>Bookmarking People</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Similar to setting the Home person, you can bookmark other
 | 
						|
        people from the database to simplify further navigation. To bookmark a
 | 
						|
        person, first navigate to that person, then choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
            <guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <guimenuitem>Add bookmark</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
          </menuchoice>. To move to that person from anywhere in the database,
 | 
						|
        choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
            <guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <guisubmenu>Go to bookmark</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <guimenuitem><replaceable>Person's
 | 
						|
            name</replaceable></guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
          </menuchoice>.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>You can manage your bookmarks by choosing <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
            <guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <guimenuitem>Edit bookmarks...</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
          </menuchoice>. This opens the following <guilabel>Edit
 | 
						|
        Bookmarks</guilabel> dialog with the list of bookmarks and the
 | 
						|
        controls to modify this list.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Edit Bookmarks dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="edit-bm-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Edit Bookmarks dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="376" fileref="figures/edit-bm.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" width="412" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Edit Bookmarks dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ================ Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-nav-find">
 | 
						|
        <title>Finding records</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>To find a record in a database, first switch to the appropriate
 | 
						|
        View that provides the list of the desired records: People, Sources,
 | 
						|
        Places, or Media. Then start typing the name of a person or the title
 | 
						|
        of a Source, Place, or Media object that you are looking for,
 | 
						|
        respectively. You may also press <keycap>Ctrl+F</keycap> to turn on
 | 
						|
        the search mode, but simply staring to type is also enough.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Type-ahead find ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="find-people-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Type-ahead find</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="352" fileref="figures/find-people.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" width="500" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows type-ahead find.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>As you type, the first record in the list that is compatible
 | 
						|
        with your input will be selected.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <title>Finding People</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>For more complex people searches you may want to use filters.
 | 
						|
          Enable filter controls by choosing <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
              <guimenu>View</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <guimenuitem>Filter</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
            </menuchoice>, select the desired filter, and click
 | 
						|
          <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>. For details, see <xref
 | 
						|
          linkend="filters" /></para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="gen-reports">
 | 
						|
      <title>Generating Reports</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>Reports are the most common form of the output produced by
 | 
						|
      genealogical research. The majority of genealogical software puts a lot
 | 
						|
      of emphasis on developing nice looking reports. GRAMPS is no exception
 | 
						|
      in this regard, offering a choice of a variety of reports. GRAMPS can
 | 
						|
      generate reports in a multitude of open formats, both text based and
 | 
						|
      graphical. GRAMPS can also produce screen based reports that are
 | 
						|
      convenient for viewing a summary of your database. Finally, GRAMPS can
 | 
						|
      generate a web site suitable for immediate posting on the Internet. All
 | 
						|
      of these are almost infinitely flexible. If you wish to modify or extend
 | 
						|
      the default format of GRAMPS report, you can design and choose the style
 | 
						|
      for each of your reports.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>All reports can be accessed through the menu by choosing
 | 
						|
      <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guisubmenu><replaceable>Report Type</replaceable></guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guimenuitem><replaceable>Particular
 | 
						|
          Report</replaceable></guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
        </menuchoice>. Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of
 | 
						|
      available reports along with their brief descriptions in a
 | 
						|
      <guilabel>Report Selection</guilabel> dialog invoked by clicking the
 | 
						|
      <guibutton>Reports</guibutton> icon on the toolbar.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="subst-values">
 | 
						|
        <title>Substitution Values</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Many of the graphical reports allow you to customize the
 | 
						|
        information on the display. Variable substituions are used to
 | 
						|
        substitute date for a particular symbol. There are two styles of
 | 
						|
        variables. The difference between the two styles is how empty data is
 | 
						|
        handled.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The first style of variables are preceeded by a '$'. If the
 | 
						|
        variable evaluates to an empty string, the variable is replaced with
 | 
						|
        the empty string. The second style of variables are preceeded by a
 | 
						|
        '%'. If the variable evaluates to an empty string, the line that
 | 
						|
        contains the variable is removed from the output.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>$n/%n</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Displays the person's name in the form of FirstName
 | 
						|
              LastName</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>$N/%N</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Displays the person's name in the form of LastName,
 | 
						|
              FirstName</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>$i/%i</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Displays the GRAMPS ID associated with the person.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>$b/%b</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Displays the person's date of birth</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>$B/%B</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Displays the person's place of birth</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>$d/%d</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Displays the person's date of death</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>$D/%D</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Displays the person's place of death</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>$s/%s</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in the
 | 
						|
              form of FirstName LastName</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>$S/%S</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in the
 | 
						|
              form of LastName, FirstName.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>$m/%m</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Displays the marriage date of the person and the preferred
 | 
						|
              spouse.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>$M/%M</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Displays the place assocated with the marriage of the
 | 
						|
              person and the preferred spouse.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="rep-books">
 | 
						|
        <title>Books</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Currently, the only available report under this category is the
 | 
						|
        Book Report.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The Book Report creates a single document (i.e. a Book)
 | 
						|
        containing a collection of graphical and textual reports.
 | 
						|
        Consequently, this allows for a very rich set of documents that GRAMPS
 | 
						|
        can produce.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>When Book Report is selected, the following book configuration
 | 
						|
        dialog appears:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== Figure: Book Report dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <figure id="rep-book-fig">
 | 
						|
          <title>Book Report dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <screenshot>
 | 
						|
            <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
              <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                <imagedata depth="524" fileref="figures/bookreport.png"
 | 
						|
                           format="PNG" width="510" />
 | 
						|
              </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <textobject>
 | 
						|
                <phrase>Shows Book Report dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
              </textobject>
 | 
						|
            </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
          </screenshot>
 | 
						|
        </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The <guilabel>Book name</guilabel> text entry field is used to
 | 
						|
        save the book (a set of configured selections) for future use. The top
 | 
						|
        pane lists the items available for inclusion in the book. The bottom
 | 
						|
        pane lists the currently selected items in the order they will appear
 | 
						|
        in the book.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The horizontal set of buttons by the <guilabel>Book
 | 
						|
        name</guilabel> field operates on the whole book. Click the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button to clear all items from the
 | 
						|
        current book. Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the
 | 
						|
        current book (under the name typed in the <guilabel>Book
 | 
						|
        name</guilabel> text entry field) for future use.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>Saving the book also saves the configuration for each
 | 
						|
          item.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Click the <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button to load the book
 | 
						|
        from the list of previously saved books. Finally, click the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Edit books</guibutton> button to invoke the editable list
 | 
						|
        of available books.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The vertical set of buttons to the right of the bottom pane
 | 
						|
        operates on the selected book item. Click the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button to add selected item from the
 | 
						|
        available list to the current book. Click the
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to remove an item from the
 | 
						|
        current book. Use <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Down</guibutton> to change the items order in the current
 | 
						|
        book. Click the <guibutton>Setup</guibutton> button to configure the
 | 
						|
        options of the selected item of the current book.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The configuration dialogs invoked by
 | 
						|
        <guibutton>Setup</guibutton> are item-specific. If you choose not to
 | 
						|
        configure the item, same defaults will be used for all needed options.
 | 
						|
        The common option for almost all book items is the center person: the
 | 
						|
        person on whom the item is centered. Thanks to this option, you can
 | 
						|
        create a book with items centered on different people (e.g. your mom's
 | 
						|
        and dad's ancestors as separate chapters). By default, the center
 | 
						|
        person is set to the active person.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Almost all items available for inclusion in the book are textual
 | 
						|
        or graphical reports, and are therefore available in the form of
 | 
						|
        standalone reports. The exception is the following items which are
 | 
						|
        only available as book items:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Title Page</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This item produces a customized Title page. You can
 | 
						|
              configure the text of title, subtitle, and the footer of the
 | 
						|
              page. An image can be optionally placed between the subtitle and
 | 
						|
              the footer. Because of its configurability, this item can be
 | 
						|
              used to create title pages for the whole book, its chapter, or
 | 
						|
              even a single item.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Custom Text</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This item produces a page with three paragraphs, each
 | 
						|
              containing custom text. The appearance of the text can be
 | 
						|
              adjusted by using custom styles. This item was meant to be used
 | 
						|
              for epigraphs, dedications, explanations, notes, and so
 | 
						|
              forth.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="rep-codegen">
 | 
						|
        <title>Code Generators</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>This category contains reports that produce code intended to be
 | 
						|
        run through the computer, rather than the usual formatted output for
 | 
						|
        human reading. The only code generator currently available in GRAMPS
 | 
						|
        is the Relationship Graph producing the GraphViz description of the
 | 
						|
        graph.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The Relationship Graph creates a complex relationship graph in
 | 
						|
        GraphViz format. The GraphViz <command>dot</command> tool can
 | 
						|
        transform the graph into postscript, jpeg, png, vrml, svg, and other
 | 
						|
        formats. GraphViz tools are freely available from the <ulink
 | 
						|
        type="http" url="http://www.graphviz.org">GraphViz site</ulink>.
 | 
						|
        Specific options for this report include filter and number of
 | 
						|
        generations considered, as well as several GraphViz-specific options
 | 
						|
        related to pagination, color, and details of the graph.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>If you are not interested in GraphViz code itself and just
 | 
						|
          want to generate graphical output, GRAMPS can do it for you under
 | 
						|
          the hood. Look for <guilabel>Relationship Graph</guilabel> in the
 | 
						|
          Graphical Reports category, <xref linkend="rep-graph" /></para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="rep-graph">
 | 
						|
        <title>Graphical Reports</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Graphical reports represent information in forms of charts and
 | 
						|
        graphs. Most of the options are common among graphical reports,
 | 
						|
        therefore they will be described only once, at the end of this
 | 
						|
        section. The few options which are specific to a given report will be
 | 
						|
        described directly in that report's entry.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The following graphical reports are currently available in
 | 
						|
        GRAMPS:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Ancestor Chart</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report generates the chart of people who are
 | 
						|
              ancestors of the Active person. Specific options include the
 | 
						|
              number of generations considered and the format of the displayed
 | 
						|
              entries.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Ancestor Chart (Wall Chart)</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report is similar to the Ancestor Chart report. It
 | 
						|
              provides more options which make it useful for generating huge
 | 
						|
              charts suitable for a poster or a wall chart. These options
 | 
						|
              include the ability to compress the report (getting rid of an
 | 
						|
              empty space) and the option to fit the whole chart on to a
 | 
						|
              single page. In the latter case, the contents of the chart is
 | 
						|
              scaled down appropriately.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Descendant Graph</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report generates a graph of people who are
 | 
						|
              descendants of the Active person. Specific options include the
 | 
						|
              format of the displayed entries.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Fan Chart</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report produces a chart resembling a fan, with Active
 | 
						|
              person in the center, parents the the semicircle next to it,
 | 
						|
              grandparents in the next semicircle, and so on, for a total of
 | 
						|
              five generations.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Relationship Graph</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report creates a complex relationship graph in
 | 
						|
              GraphViz format and then converts into graphical output running
 | 
						|
              it through the the GraphViz <command>dot</command> tool behind
 | 
						|
              the scene. Specific options for this report include filter,
 | 
						|
              options for dates and places for the events, and whether to
 | 
						|
              include URLs and IDs for individuals and families. There are
 | 
						|
              also several GraphViz-specific options related to pagination,
 | 
						|
              color, and details of the graph.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Statistics Chart</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report can collect and display a wealth of
 | 
						|
              statistical data about your database. Specific options include
 | 
						|
              filter, sorting methods, and additional birth- and gender-based
 | 
						|
              limit for inclusion into statistics. You can also set the
 | 
						|
              minimum number of items to qualify for the bar chart, so that
 | 
						|
              the charts with fewer items will generate a pie chart instead.
 | 
						|
              The <guilabel>Chart Selection</guilabel> tab allows you to check
 | 
						|
              which charts you want to include in your report.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Timeline Graph</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report outputs the list of people with their
 | 
						|
              lifetimes represented by intervals on a common chronological
 | 
						|
              scale. Specific options include filter, sorting method, and the
 | 
						|
              title of the report.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Common options for graphical reports are the filename of the
 | 
						|
        output, the format of the output, selected style, page size and
 | 
						|
        orientation. Optionally, the reports can be immediately opened with
 | 
						|
        the default application.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>The options used in reports are persistent: each report
 | 
						|
          remembers its options used last time.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="rep-text">
 | 
						|
        <title>Text Reports</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Text reports represent the desired information as formatted
 | 
						|
        text. Most of the options are common among text reports, therefore
 | 
						|
        they will be described only once, at the end of this section. The
 | 
						|
        options which are specific to a given report will be described
 | 
						|
        directly in that report's entry.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The following text reports are currently available in
 | 
						|
        GRAMPS:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Ahnentafel Report</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report lists the active person and his or her
 | 
						|
              ancestors along with their vital data. The people are numbered
 | 
						|
              in a special way which is an established standard called
 | 
						|
              Ahnentafel. The active person is given number 1. His or her
 | 
						|
              father and mother have numbers 2 and 3, respectively. This rule
 | 
						|
              holds for every person while going back in generations: father's
 | 
						|
              parents are numbered 4 and 5, and mother's parents are numbered
 | 
						|
              6 and 7, fathers always numbered with even and mothers with odd
 | 
						|
              numbers. Therefore, for any person having number N in this tree,
 | 
						|
              the numbers of father and mother are 2N and 2N+1,
 | 
						|
              respectively.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Complete Individual Report</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report provides individual summaries similar to that
 | 
						|
              of the Individual Summary report. The advantage of this report
 | 
						|
              is the specific filter option. Depending on the filter choice
 | 
						|
              (active person only, his or her descendants, his or her
 | 
						|
              ancestors, or entire database), the report may contain from one
 | 
						|
              to many individual summaries. Another option for this report is
 | 
						|
              the inclusion of source information when listing events.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Comprehensive Ancestors Report</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report produces a comprehensive description of
 | 
						|
              ancestors of the active person. The highlights of this report
 | 
						|
              include elaborate layout, images of children, present and former
 | 
						|
              spouses, and source citations. Specific options: number of
 | 
						|
              backward generations to consider, whether to cite sources, and
 | 
						|
              whether to break pages between generations.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Descendant Report</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report produces a brief description of descendants of
 | 
						|
              the active person. Specific options: number of forward
 | 
						|
              generations to consider.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Detailed Ancestral Report</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report covers in detail the ancestors of the active
 | 
						|
              person. It includes vital data (birth and death) as well as
 | 
						|
              marriages. Specific options: number of backward generations to
 | 
						|
              consider, as well as a variety of options regarding the exact
 | 
						|
              contents to include.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Detailed Descendant Report</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report covers in detail the descendants of the active
 | 
						|
              person. It includes vital (birth and death) information as well
 | 
						|
              as marriages. Specific options: number of forward generations to
 | 
						|
              consider.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>FTM Style Ancestral Report</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report creates an ancestral report similar to that
 | 
						|
              produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It covers in
 | 
						|
              detail the active person and his/her ancestors It includes vital
 | 
						|
              information as well as marriages, children, and notes. Specific
 | 
						|
              options: number of backward generations to consider.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>FTM Style Descendant Report</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report creates a descendant report similar to that
 | 
						|
              produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It covers in
 | 
						|
              detail the active person and his/her descendants. It includes
 | 
						|
              vital information as well as marriages, children, and notes.
 | 
						|
              Specific options: number of forward generations to
 | 
						|
              consider.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Family Group Report</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This creates a family group report, showing information on
 | 
						|
              a set of parents and their children. Specific options: the
 | 
						|
              spouse (available only if the active person has more than one
 | 
						|
              spouse).</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Individual Summary</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report produces a detailed summary on the active
 | 
						|
              person. The report includes all the facts known to the database
 | 
						|
              about that person.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Common options for text reports are the filename of the output,
 | 
						|
        the format of the output, selected style, page size and orientation.
 | 
						|
        For HTML reports, there is no page information. Instead, HTML options
 | 
						|
        include the choice of the HTML template, either available in GRAMPS or
 | 
						|
        a custom template defined by you. Optionally, the reports can be
 | 
						|
        immediately opened with the default application.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>The options used in reports are persistent: each report
 | 
						|
          remembers its options used last time.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="rep-view">
 | 
						|
        <title>View Reports</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>View reports are representing overall summaries of the database
 | 
						|
        information available immediately for on-screen viewing. The following
 | 
						|
        view reports are currently available in GRAMPS:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Number of ancestors</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report displays the number of ancestors of the active
 | 
						|
              person.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Summary of the database</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This report displays the overall statistics concerning
 | 
						|
              number of individuals of each gender, various incomplete entries
 | 
						|
              statistics, as well as family and media statistics.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="rep-web">
 | 
						|
        <title>Web Page</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The only available report in this category is the Narrative Web
 | 
						|
        Site report. It generates a web site (that is, a set of linked web
 | 
						|
        pages), for a set of selected individuals.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <sect3 id="rep-web-narr">
 | 
						|
          <title>Narrative Web Site</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <variablelist>
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Introduction</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>GRAMPS 2.0.6 introduced the Narrative Web generator. The
 | 
						|
                new tool provides considerably more functionality than the
 | 
						|
                older web generator. Instead of using HTML templates to
 | 
						|
                customize the pages, CSS style sheets are used.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>More information is now displayed about each person,
 | 
						|
                along with information about sources, places, and media
 | 
						|
                objects. Introduction pages can be added to provide additional
 | 
						|
                information, such as family history.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Selecting the output</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>Genealogy records can generate a lot of files. Many web
 | 
						|
                servers have a difficult time with many files in a single
 | 
						|
                directory. The Narrative Web Generator strives to keep the
 | 
						|
                number of files per directory to a managable level. To do
 | 
						|
                this, a hierarchy of directores is created. The generated
 | 
						|
                files names are not intuitive, but are unique per person.
 | 
						|
                Subsequent runs will geneate identical file names, making it
 | 
						|
                easy to replace files.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>By default, the output files are written to the
 | 
						|
                specified directory. Because of the number of files and
 | 
						|
                directories that are created, it may be difficult to transfer
 | 
						|
                the files to an external web host. To aid in this, you may
 | 
						|
                directly create a gzip'd tar file to more easily upload the
 | 
						|
                data. This is the format that should be used if you would like
 | 
						|
                to take advantage of the free genealogy page hosting at the
 | 
						|
                <ulink type="http"
 | 
						|
                url="http://family.gramps-project.org">GRAMPS web hosting
 | 
						|
                site</ulink>.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>To select the gzip'd tar file, select the
 | 
						|
                <guilabel>Store web pages in .tar.gz archive</guilabel>
 | 
						|
                option.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Applying a filter</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>Like the previous web page generator, and most of the
 | 
						|
                other GRAMPS reports, you can control what is included in the
 | 
						|
                output by choosing a filter. Several default filters are
 | 
						|
                provided for you, but you are free to use the Custom Filter
 | 
						|
                Editor tool to create your own.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>Any person matching this filter who is not excluded due
 | 
						|
                to the privacy rules, will be included in the output. The
 | 
						|
                default filter includes all people in the database.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Applying a style sheet</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>GRAMPS provides six built in style sheets for your web
 | 
						|
                page. Each of these style sheets produces a unique look for
 | 
						|
                your pages. The generated style sheet is named
 | 
						|
                <filename>narrative.css</filename>. You may edit this file if
 | 
						|
                you wish to further customize your site.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>If you make modifications to your style sheet, you need
 | 
						|
                to be aware the regenerating the pages with the same output
 | 
						|
                directory will overwrite your changes to this file. To prevent
 | 
						|
                this from happening, make sure you choose <guilabel>No style
 | 
						|
                sheet</guilabel> for subsequent runs.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Character set encoding</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>Because of GRAMPS internationalization ability, the
 | 
						|
                default character set for the HTML pages is UTF-8. This
 | 
						|
                provides support for virtually all characters.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>The Apache web server is sometimes misconfigured to
 | 
						|
                override the character set specified in an HTML page. This
 | 
						|
                causes problems with the UTF-8 character set generated by
 | 
						|
                GRAMPS, distorting characters on the screen.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>If your web server is misconfigured and you do not have
 | 
						|
                priveledge to fix the configururation, you may solve this
 | 
						|
                problem by overriding the default character set to match what
 | 
						|
                your web server may be expecting.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Copyright notice</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>International copyright law reserves all rights to your
 | 
						|
                data. You own the data, and people must get your permission to
 | 
						|
                use it. In genealogy, however, sharing data is a common ideal.
 | 
						|
                It this case, you may wish to grant the user more
 | 
						|
                rights.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>While the default for GRAMPS is to place a notice
 | 
						|
                indicating that all rights are reserved, we give you the
 | 
						|
                option to place your site under one of several of the Create
 | 
						|
                Commons licenses. With a Creative Commons license, you grant
 | 
						|
                user's certain permission to use your data without requiring
 | 
						|
                them to contact you directly for permission.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>See the <ulink type="http"
 | 
						|
                url="http://creativecommons.org/">Creative Commons</ulink> web
 | 
						|
                site for more information.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Controlling page generation</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>Three additional pages can be generated by the web page
 | 
						|
                generator. The Home page is a page that will display an image
 | 
						|
                and a whatever text you wish. To enable this page, choose a
 | 
						|
                Media Object from the <guilabel>Home Media/Note ID</guilabel>
 | 
						|
                menu on the <guilabel>Page Generation</guilabel> tab. If the
 | 
						|
                Media Object contains an image, the image is displayed at the
 | 
						|
                top of the page. If the Media Object contains a Note, the
 | 
						|
                Note's text is used for the text of the page. A second page,
 | 
						|
                the Introduction page, works similarly. Just choose the Media
 | 
						|
                Object in the <guilabel>Introduction Media/Note ID</guilabel>
 | 
						|
                menu.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>If you choose to include a contact page, the researcher
 | 
						|
                information stored in the database is displayed, along with
 | 
						|
                the information specified in the <guilabel>Publisher
 | 
						|
                contact/Note ID</guilabel> menu. Please use this page with
 | 
						|
                caution, since you may consider your contact information to be
 | 
						|
                private.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Privacy</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>Privacy of personal information is an important issue on
 | 
						|
                the web today. GRAMPS tries to give you control over the
 | 
						|
                information that is presented.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>GRAMPS provides two options to control the privacy of
 | 
						|
                your information. If you select the <guilabel>Do not include
 | 
						|
                records marked private</guilabel> option, any data that is
 | 
						|
                marked as private will not be displayed on the generated site.
 | 
						|
                If you select <guilabel>Restrict information on living
 | 
						|
                people</guilabel>, GRAMPS will attempt to determine which
 | 
						|
                people have the potential of still being alive, and will omit
 | 
						|
                these people from the database. Some countries have laws that
 | 
						|
                indicate that a certain number of years must pass after
 | 
						|
                someone's death before information can be published. The
 | 
						|
                <guilabel>Years to restrict from person's death</guilabel>
 | 
						|
                option allows you to specifiy how many years a person must be
 | 
						|
                deceased before the information is included.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>Please note that it is your responsibility to double
 | 
						|
                check all information in the pages for any privacy
 | 
						|
                information. GRAMPS cannot be held responsible for any privacy
 | 
						|
                issues.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Adding custom code your pages</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>If you are not interested in customizing your pages, you
 | 
						|
                may skip the section.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>The previous web generator allowed you to customize your
 | 
						|
                pages using HTML templates. Your data would be substituted for
 | 
						|
                certain markers in the code.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>This method proved to be too cumbersome for most users.
 | 
						|
                The Narrative Web Page Generator introduces a simpler
 | 
						|
                mechanism. On the <guilabel>Page Generation</guilabel> tab,
 | 
						|
                you may specify text (including HTML code) that will be
 | 
						|
                inserted into each page, separately for the header and the
 | 
						|
                footer.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>To create this code, you need to create a Media Object
 | 
						|
                marked as an internal note. To create this, add a new Media
 | 
						|
                Object in the Media View, and select the internal note option.
 | 
						|
                You may then enter your HTML code.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>To insert the code from the internal notes into the web
 | 
						|
                pages, select the appropriate Media Objects from the
 | 
						|
                <guilabel>HTML user header</guilabel> and <guilabel>HTML user
 | 
						|
                footer</guilabel> menus. Two div sections will be added to the
 | 
						|
                pages - userheader and userfooter. The corresponding HTML code
 | 
						|
                is inserted into the HTML page surrounded by div markers. You
 | 
						|
                can customize your style sheet to provide additional
 | 
						|
                formatting and positioning information to control these
 | 
						|
                sections.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          </variablelist>
 | 
						|
        </sect3>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- ================ Usage Subsection ================================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="gramps-tools">
 | 
						|
      <title>Running Tools</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>GRAMPS tools allow you to perform various types of analysis of
 | 
						|
      your genealogical data. Typically, the tools do not produce output in
 | 
						|
      form of printouts or files. Instead, they produce screen output
 | 
						|
      immediately available for the researcher. However, when appropriate, you
 | 
						|
      can save the results of running a tool into a file. Tools present one of
 | 
						|
      the major strengths of GRAMPS compared to the most genealogical
 | 
						|
      software.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>The tools can be accessed through the menu by choosing <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>Tools</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guisubmenu><replaceable>Tool Section</replaceable></guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guimenuitem><replaceable>Particular
 | 
						|
          Tool</replaceable></guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
        </menuchoice>. Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of
 | 
						|
      available tools along with their brief descriptions in a <guilabel>Tool
 | 
						|
      Selection</guilabel> dialog invoked by clicking the
 | 
						|
      <guibutton>Tools</guibutton> icon on the toolbar.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="tools-ae">
 | 
						|
        <title>Analysis and Exploration</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>This section contains tools which analyze and explore the
 | 
						|
        database, but do not alter it. The following analysis and exploration
 | 
						|
        tools are currently available in GRAMPS:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Compare individual events</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This tool compares events across the selected group of
 | 
						|
              people. The people for this comparison are chosen with the use
 | 
						|
              of custom filters. The custom filters can be created in the
 | 
						|
              Custom Filter Editor (see <xref linkend="tools-util-cfe" />)
 | 
						|
              that can be invoked by clicking the <guilabel>Custom Filter
 | 
						|
              Editor</guilabel> button. The resulting table produced by this
 | 
						|
              tool can be saved as a spreadsheet.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Interactive descendant browser</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This tool builds a tree with the active person being the
 | 
						|
              root. Children branch from their parents in the usual manner.
 | 
						|
              Use this tool for a quick glance of a person's
 | 
						|
              descendants.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <tip>
 | 
						|
                <para>Double-clicking on tree node will bring up the
 | 
						|
                <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog allowing to view or
 | 
						|
                modify the personal data.</para>
 | 
						|
              </tip>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="tools-db">
 | 
						|
        <title>Database Processing</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>This section contains tools which may modify your database. The
 | 
						|
        tools from this section are used mostly for finding and correcting
 | 
						|
        errors in the data. The following database processing tools are
 | 
						|
        currently available in GRAMPS:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <note>
 | 
						|
          <para>The modifications will only be performed upon your explicit
 | 
						|
          consent, except for the automatic fixes performed by <guilabel>Check
 | 
						|
          and repair database</guilabel> tool.</para>
 | 
						|
        </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Check and repair database</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This tool checks the database for integrity problems,
 | 
						|
              fixing the problems it can. Specifically, the tool is checking
 | 
						|
              for:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
                <listitem>
 | 
						|
                  <para>Broken family links. These are the cases when a
 | 
						|
                  person's record refers to a family while the family's record
 | 
						|
                  does not refer to that person, and vice versa.</para>
 | 
						|
                </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <listitem>
 | 
						|
                  <para>Missing media objects. The missing media object is the
 | 
						|
                  object whose file is referenced in the database but does not
 | 
						|
                  exist. This can happen when the file is accidentally
 | 
						|
                  deleted, renamed, or moved to another location.</para>
 | 
						|
                </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <listitem>
 | 
						|
                  <para>Empty families. These are the family entries which
 | 
						|
                  have no reference to any person as their member.</para>
 | 
						|
                </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <listitem>
 | 
						|
                  <para>Parent relationship. This checks all families to
 | 
						|
                  ensure that father and mother are not mixed up. The check is
 | 
						|
                  also made that parents have different gender. If they have
 | 
						|
                  common gender then their relationship is renamed to
 | 
						|
                  "Partners".</para>
 | 
						|
                </listitem>
 | 
						|
              </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Extract information from names</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This tool searches the entire database and attempts to
 | 
						|
              extract titles and nicknames that may be embedded in a person's
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Given name</guilabel> field. If any information could
 | 
						|
              be extracted, the candidates for fixing will be presented in the
 | 
						|
              table. You may then decide which to repair as suggested and
 | 
						|
              which not to.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Find possible duplicate people</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This tool searches the entire database, looking for the
 | 
						|
              entries that may represent the same person.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Fix capitalization of family names</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This tool searches the entire database and attempts to fix
 | 
						|
              the capitalization of family names. The aim is to have
 | 
						|
              conventional capitalization: capital first letter and lower case
 | 
						|
              for the rest of the family name. If deviations from this rule
 | 
						|
              are detected, the candidates for fixing will be presented in the
 | 
						|
              table. You may then decide which to repair as suggested and
 | 
						|
              which not to.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Rename personal event types</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This tool allows all the events of a certain name to be
 | 
						|
              renamed to a new name.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Reorder GRAMPS IDs</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This tool reorders the GRAMPS IDs according to the
 | 
						|
              defaults of GRAMPS.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="tools-debug">
 | 
						|
        <title>Debug</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>This section contains debugging tools that are not of general
 | 
						|
        interest for many of the users of GRAMPS. If you're not interested in
 | 
						|
        debugging or developing GRAMPS you may safely skip this
 | 
						|
        section.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Python evaluation window</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Enter expression into the <guilabel>Evaluation
 | 
						|
              Window</guilabel>, get the output in <guilabel>Output
 | 
						|
              Window</guilabel>. Any errors should end up in the
 | 
						|
              <guilabel>Error Window</guilabel>.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Reload plugins</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Makes an attempt to reload all plugins.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <note>
 | 
						|
                <para>This tool is itself a plugin, but it will not reload
 | 
						|
                itself!</para>
 | 
						|
              </note>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>Show uncollected objects</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Provides the window listing all uncollected objects.
 | 
						|
              Depending on the system settings, recently abandoned GUI objects
 | 
						|
              may still be uncollected.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- =============== Usage Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="tools-util">
 | 
						|
        <title>Utilities</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>This section contains tools allowing you to perform a simple
 | 
						|
        operation on a portion of data. The results can be saved in your
 | 
						|
        database, but they will not modify your existing data. The following
 | 
						|
        utilities are currently available in GRAMPS:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <sect3 id="tools-util-cfe">
 | 
						|
          <title>Custom Filter Editor</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>The Custom Filter Editor builds custom filters that can be
 | 
						|
          used to select people included in reports, exports, and other tools
 | 
						|
          and utilities. This is in fact a very powerful tool in genealogical
 | 
						|
          analysis.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>When you launch it, the <guilabel>User defined
 | 
						|
          filters</guilabel> dialog appears that lists all the filters (if
 | 
						|
          any) previously defined by you. Click the
 | 
						|
          <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button to define a new filter. Once
 | 
						|
          you have designed your filters, you can edit, test, and delete
 | 
						|
          selected filters using the <guibutton>Edit...</guibutton>,
 | 
						|
          <guibutton>Test...</guibutton>, and <guibutton>Delete</guibutton>
 | 
						|
          buttons, respectively. All the filters displayed in the list will be
 | 
						|
          automatically saved along with your database and will be available
 | 
						|
          with subsequent sessions of GRAMPS.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <note>
 | 
						|
            <para>The changes made to the filters only take effect when you
 | 
						|
            click the <guibutton>Apply and close</guibutton> button.</para>
 | 
						|
          </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Clicking the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button invokes the
 | 
						|
          following <guilabel>Define filter</guilabel> dialog:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== Figure: Define filter dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <figure id="cfe-df-fig">
 | 
						|
            <title>Define filter dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <screenshot>
 | 
						|
              <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                  <imagedata depth="410" fileref="figures/cfe-df.png"
 | 
						|
                             format="PNG" width="400" />
 | 
						|
                </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <textobject>
 | 
						|
                  <phrase>Shows Define filter dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                </textobject>
 | 
						|
              </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
            </screenshot>
 | 
						|
          </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Type the name for your new filter into the
 | 
						|
          <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. Enter any comment that would help
 | 
						|
          you identify this filter in the future into the
 | 
						|
          <guilabel>Comment</guilabel> field. Add as many rules to the
 | 
						|
          <guilabel>Rule list</guilabel> as you would like to your filter
 | 
						|
          using <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button. If the filter has more
 | 
						|
          than one rule, select one of the <guilabel>Rule
 | 
						|
          operations</guilabel>. This allows you to choose whether all rules
 | 
						|
          must apply, only one (either) rule must apply, or exactly one
 | 
						|
          (either) rule must apply, in order for the filter to generate a
 | 
						|
          match. If your filter has only one rule, this selection has no
 | 
						|
          effect.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Check <guilabel>Return values that do not match the filter
 | 
						|
          rules</guilabel> to invert the filter rule. For example, inverting
 | 
						|
          "has a common ancestor with I1" rule will match everyone who does
 | 
						|
          not have a common ancestor with that person).</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Clicking the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button invokes the
 | 
						|
          following <guilabel>Add Rule</guilabel> dialog:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== Figure: Add Rule dialog ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <figure id="cfe-ar-fig">
 | 
						|
            <title>Add Rule dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <screenshot>
 | 
						|
              <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                  <imagedata depth="297" fileref="figures/cfe-ar.png"
 | 
						|
                             format="PNG" width="500" />
 | 
						|
                </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <textobject>
 | 
						|
                  <phrase>Shows Add Rule dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                </textobject>
 | 
						|
              </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
            </screenshot>
 | 
						|
          </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>The pane on the left-hand side displays available filter rules
 | 
						|
          arranged by their categories in an expandable tree. For detailed
 | 
						|
          filter rule reference, see <xref linkend="append-filtref" />. Click
 | 
						|
          on the arrows to fold/unfold the appropriate category. Select the
 | 
						|
          rule from the tree by clicking on its name. The right-hand side
 | 
						|
          displays the name, the description, and the values for the currently
 | 
						|
          selected rule. Once you are satisfied with your rule selection and
 | 
						|
          its values, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to add this rule to the
 | 
						|
          rule list of the currently edited filter. Clicking
 | 
						|
          <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> will abort adding the rule to the
 | 
						|
          filter.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <tip>
 | 
						|
            <para>A filter you have already designed may be used as a rule for
 | 
						|
            another filter. This gives you nearly infinite flexibility in
 | 
						|
            custom-tailoring your selection criteria that can be later used in
 | 
						|
            most of the exports, reports, and some of the tools (such as
 | 
						|
            comparing individual events).</para>
 | 
						|
          </tip>
 | 
						|
        </sect3>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <sect3 id="tools-util-scratch-pad">
 | 
						|
          <title>Scratch Pad</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>This tool provides a temporary note pad to store database
 | 
						|
          records for easy reuse. In short, this is a sort of the
 | 
						|
          copy-and-paste functionality extended from textual objects to other
 | 
						|
          types of records used in GRAMPS.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <tip>
 | 
						|
            <para>Scratch Pad makes extensive use of drag-and-drop
 | 
						|
            technique.</para>
 | 
						|
          </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>To invoke Scratch Pad, either choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
              <guimenu>Tools</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <guisubmenu>Utilities</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <guimenuitem>Scratch Pad</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
            </menuchoice> or click the <guilabel>ScratchPad</guilabel> button
 | 
						|
          on the toolbar. The following window will appear:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== Figure: Scratch Pad tool ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <figure id="scratch-pad-fig">
 | 
						|
            <title>Scratch Pad tool</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <screenshot>
 | 
						|
              <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
                <imageobject>
 | 
						|
                  <imagedata depth="246" fileref="figures/scratch-pad.png"
 | 
						|
                             format="PNG" width="500" />
 | 
						|
                </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <textobject>
 | 
						|
                  <phrase>Shows Add Scratch Pad tool.</phrase>
 | 
						|
                </textobject>
 | 
						|
              </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
            </screenshot>
 | 
						|
          </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Scratch Pad supports addresses, attributes (both personal and
 | 
						|
          family), events (both personal and family), names, media objects
 | 
						|
          references, source references, URLs, and of course textual
 | 
						|
          information of notes and comments. To store any type of these
 | 
						|
          records, simply drag the existing record on to the Scratch Pad from
 | 
						|
          the corresponding editor dialog. To reuse the record, drag it from
 | 
						|
          the Scratch Pad on to the corresponding place in the editor, e.g.
 | 
						|
          Address tab, Attribute tab, etc.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <tip>
 | 
						|
            <para>Some objects are showing the link icon on the left. This
 | 
						|
            indicates that dragging such selection will produce a reference to
 | 
						|
            an existing object, not copy the object itself.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>For example, the media object file will not be duplicated.
 | 
						|
            Instead, the reference will be made to an existing media object,
 | 
						|
            which will result in the local gallery entry.</para>
 | 
						|
          </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <tip>
 | 
						|
            <para>Scratch Pad storage is persistent within a single GRAMPS
 | 
						|
            session. Closing the window will not lose the stored records.
 | 
						|
            However, exiting GRAMPS will.</para>
 | 
						|
          </tip>
 | 
						|
        </sect3>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <sect3 id="tools-util-other">
 | 
						|
          <title>Other tools</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <variablelist>
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Generate SoundEx codes</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>This utility generates SoundEx codes for the names of
 | 
						|
                people in the database. Please visit the <ulink type="http"
 | 
						|
                url="http://www.archives.gov/research_room/genealogy/census/soundex.html">NARA
 | 
						|
                Soundex Indexing page</ulink> to learn more about Soundex
 | 
						|
                Indexing System.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Relationship calculator</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>This utility calculates and displays the relationship of
 | 
						|
                any person to the active person.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              <term>Verify the database</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <listitem>
 | 
						|
                <para>This utility allows you to verify the database based on
 | 
						|
                the set of criteria specified by you.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <tip>
 | 
						|
                  <title>Difference between Verify tool and previously
 | 
						|
                  described Check tool</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <para>The Check tool detects inconsistencies in the database
 | 
						|
                  structure. The Verify tool, however, is detecting the
 | 
						|
                  records that do not satisfy your particular criteria.</para>
 | 
						|
                </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <para>For example, you may want to make sure that nobody in
 | 
						|
                your database had children at the age of 98. Based on common
 | 
						|
                sense, such a record would indicate an error. However, it is
 | 
						|
                not a consistency error in the database. Besides, someone
 | 
						|
                might have a child at the age of 98 (although this rarely
 | 
						|
                happens). The Verify tool will display everything that
 | 
						|
                violates your criteria so that you can check whether the
 | 
						|
                record is erroneous or not. The ultimate decision is
 | 
						|
                yours.</para>
 | 
						|
              </listitem>
 | 
						|
            </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          </variablelist>
 | 
						|
        </sect3>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
  </chapter>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <chapter id="gramps-settings">
 | 
						|
    <!-- $Id$ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <title>Settings</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="gramps-prefs">
 | 
						|
      <title>Preferences</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>Most of the settings in GRAMPS, are configured in the
 | 
						|
      <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel> dialog. To invoke it, choose
 | 
						|
      <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
          <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <guimenuitem>Preferences...</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
        </menuchoice>.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ==== Figure: Type-ahead find ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <figure id="prefs-fig">
 | 
						|
        <title>Preferences dialog</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <screenshot>
 | 
						|
          <mediaobject>
 | 
						|
            <imageobject>
 | 
						|
              <imagedata fileref="figures/prefs.png" format="PNG" />
 | 
						|
            </imageobject>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <textobject>
 | 
						|
              <phrase>Shows Preferences dialog.</phrase>
 | 
						|
            </textobject>
 | 
						|
          </mediaobject>
 | 
						|
        </screenshot>
 | 
						|
      </figure>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <!-- ==== End of Figure ==== -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>The pane on the left displays the tree of available option
 | 
						|
      categories. Selecting a tree node will display the corresponding options
 | 
						|
      in the right side of the dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-prefs-db">
 | 
						|
        <title>Database</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>This category contains preferences relevant to the database
 | 
						|
        itself. It has the following subcategories:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>General</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <variablelist>
 | 
						|
                <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
                  <term><guilabel>Automatically load last
 | 
						|
                  database</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>Check this box to automatically load the last open
 | 
						|
                    database on startup.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
                </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
                  <term><guilabel>Family name guessing</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>This option affects the initial family name of a
 | 
						|
                    child when he/she is added to the database.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <tip>
 | 
						|
                      <para>This option only affects the initial family name
 | 
						|
                      guessed by GRAMPS when the <guilabel>Edit
 | 
						|
                      Person</guilabel> dialog is launched. You can modify
 | 
						|
                      that name the way you see fit. Set this option to the
 | 
						|
                      value that you will most frequently use, as it will save
 | 
						|
                      you a lot of typing.</para>
 | 
						|
                    </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <para>If <guilabel>None</guilabel> is selected, no
 | 
						|
                    guessing will be attempted. Selecting <guilabel>Father's
 | 
						|
                    surname</guilabel> will use the family name of the father.
 | 
						|
                    Selecting <guilabel>Combination of mother's and father's
 | 
						|
                    surname</guilabel> will use the father's name followed by
 | 
						|
                    the mother's name. Finally, <guilabel>Icelandic
 | 
						|
                    style</guilabel> will use the father's given name followed
 | 
						|
                    by the "sson" suffix (e.g. the son of Edwin will be
 | 
						|
                    guessed as Edwinsson).</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
                </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              </variablelist>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>GRAMPS IDs</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Enter ID prefixes for various kinds of database entries
 | 
						|
              into the corresponding text entry fields.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <tip>
 | 
						|
                <para>The ID prefixes use formatting conventions common for C,
 | 
						|
                Python, and other programming languages. For example, the %04d
 | 
						|
                expands to an integer, prepended with zeros to have the total
 | 
						|
                width of four digits. If you would like IDs to be 1, 2, 3,
 | 
						|
                etc, simply set the formatting parameter to %d.</para>
 | 
						|
              </tip>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>Researcher Information</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Enter your personal information in the corresponding text
 | 
						|
              entry fields. Although GRAMPS requests information about you,
 | 
						|
              this information is used only so that GRAMPS can create valid
 | 
						|
              GEDCOM output files. A valid GEDCOM file requires information
 | 
						|
              about the file's creator. If you choose, you may leave the
 | 
						|
              information empty, however none of your exported GEDCOM files
 | 
						|
              will be valid.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="gramps-prefs-display">
 | 
						|
        <title>Display</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>This category contains preferences relevant to displaying
 | 
						|
        database records and controls in GRAMPS. It has the following
 | 
						|
        subcategories:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>General</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <variablelist>
 | 
						|
                <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
                  <term><guilabel>Default view</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>This determines which view will appear when you
 | 
						|
                    start GRAMPS. Choose between Person and Family
 | 
						|
                    views.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
                </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
                  <term><guilabel>Family view style</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>This selects between the two available styles of the
 | 
						|
                    Family view layout. The <guilabel>Left to right</guilabel>
 | 
						|
                    style is similar to the Family Tree Maker (tm), while the
 | 
						|
                    <guilabel>Top to bottom</guilabel> is similar to the
 | 
						|
                    Reunion.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
                </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
                  <term><guilabel>Always display the LDS ordinance
 | 
						|
                  tabs</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>Check this box to have LDS ordinance tabs displayed.
 | 
						|
                    If you do not know what LDS is then you probably should
 | 
						|
                    not check it.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
                </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
                  <term><guilabel>Display Tip of the Day</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>Check this box to have the <guilabel>Tip of the
 | 
						|
                    Day</guilabel> dialog appear on every startup. The tips
 | 
						|
                    are displayed randomly from the large collection of
 | 
						|
                    information bits on GRAMPS.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <tip>
 | 
						|
                      <para>The <guilabel>Tip of the Day</guilabel> is likely
 | 
						|
                      to be useful for new user of GRAMPS.</para>
 | 
						|
                    </tip>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
                </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              </variablelist>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>Dates</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Select the display format for the dates from the available
 | 
						|
              formats listed in this menu.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <tip>
 | 
						|
                <para>Available date display formats are language-specific.
 | 
						|
                Depending on whether or not there is a GRAMPS date displayer
 | 
						|
                available for your language, you may or may not have a lot of
 | 
						|
                choices.</para>
 | 
						|
              </tip>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term><guilabel>Toolbar and Statusbar</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <variablelist>
 | 
						|
                <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
                  <term><guilabel>Toolbar</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>Select the desired appearance of the toolbar icons
 | 
						|
                    from the menu. Selecting <guilabel>GNOME
 | 
						|
                    Settings</guilabel> will use the overall settings selected
 | 
						|
                    for your GNOME desktop.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
                </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
                  <term><guilabel>Statusbar</guilabel></term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>Select the desired contents displayed in the
 | 
						|
                    statusbar using the radio buttons.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
                </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              </variablelist>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="gramps-prefs-other">
 | 
						|
      <title>Other settings</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>Besides <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel> dialog, there are other
 | 
						|
      settings available in GRAMPS. For various reasons they have been made
 | 
						|
      more readily accessible, as listed below.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Column Editor</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>The columns of the list views may be added, removed, or
 | 
						|
            reordered in a <guilabel>Column Editor Dialog</guilabel>, see
 | 
						|
            <xref linkend="column-editor-fig" />. Only checked columns will be
 | 
						|
            shown in the view. To change their order, drag any column to its
 | 
						|
            desired place inside the editor. Clicking
 | 
						|
            <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will reflect the changes in the
 | 
						|
            appropriate view. To invoke <guilabel>Column Editor
 | 
						|
            Dialog</guilabel>, choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <guimenuitem>Column Editor...</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
              </menuchoice>.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <tip>
 | 
						|
              <para>The <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> is available and
 | 
						|
              works in the same way for all list views. Specifically, it is
 | 
						|
              available for People View, Family View (children list). Sources
 | 
						|
              View, Places View, and Media View.</para>
 | 
						|
            </tip>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Setting Home person</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>The Home person is the person who becomes active when
 | 
						|
            database opened, when <guibutton>Home</guibutton> button is
 | 
						|
            clicked or the <guimenuitem>Home</guimenuitem> menu item is
 | 
						|
            selected from either <guimenu>Go</guimenu> menu or the right-click
 | 
						|
            context menu anywhere.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>To set Home person, make the desired person active and then
 | 
						|
            choose <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <guimenuitem>Set Home person...</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
              </menuchoice>.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Adjusting viewing controls</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>Whether the toolbar, the sidebar, or the filter (People View
 | 
						|
            only) are displayed in the main window is adjusted through the
 | 
						|
            <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="gramps-prefs-adv">
 | 
						|
      <title>Advanced manipulation of settings</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <warning>
 | 
						|
        <para>The contents of this section is outside the scope of interest of
 | 
						|
        a general user of GRAMPS. If you proceed with tweaking the options on
 | 
						|
        the low level you may damage your GRAMPS installation. Be careful. YOU
 | 
						|
        HAVE BEEN WARNED!</para>
 | 
						|
      </warning>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>By default, GRAMPS stores its settings using gconf2 system. All
 | 
						|
      the settings used in this version of GRAMPS are stored in subdirectories
 | 
						|
      under <filename>/apps/gramps/</filename> in the gconf2 namespace.
 | 
						|
      Accessing the keys can be done either using
 | 
						|
      <command>gconftool-2</command> command line tool, or the
 | 
						|
      <command>gconf-editor</command> GUI tool.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>All keys are documented, and the notification mechanisms are used
 | 
						|
      as appropriate. Therefore, updating keys from outside of GRAMPS should
 | 
						|
      lead to updating GRAMPS in real time, without necessarily restarting
 | 
						|
      it.</para>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
  </chapter>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <!-- $Id$ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <appendix id="faq">
 | 
						|
    <title>Frequently Asked Questions</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>This appendix contains the list of questions that frequently come up
 | 
						|
    in mailing list discussions and forums. This list is by no means complete.
 | 
						|
    If you would like to add questions/answers to this list, please email your
 | 
						|
    suggestions to <ulink type="mailto"
 | 
						|
    url="mailto:gramps-devel@lists.sf.net">gramps-devel@lists.sf.net</ulink></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <variablelist>
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>What is GRAMPS?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>GRAMPS is the Genealogical Research and Analysis Management
 | 
						|
          Program System. In other words, it is a personal genealogy program
 | 
						|
          letting you store, edit, and research genealogical data using the
 | 
						|
          powers of your computer.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Where do I get it and how much does it cost?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>GRAMPS can be downloaded from <ulink type="http"
 | 
						|
          url="http://sf.net/projects/gramps">http://sf.net/projects/gramps</ulink>
 | 
						|
          at no charge. GRAMPS is an Open Source project covered by the GNU
 | 
						|
          General Public License. You have full access to the source code and
 | 
						|
          are allowed to distribute the program and source code freely.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Does it work with Windows (tm)?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>No. GRAMPS uses the GTK and GNOME libraries. While the GTK
 | 
						|
          libraries have been ported to Windows, the GNOME libraries have not.
 | 
						|
          This, however, may change in the future.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Does it work with the Mac?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para><ulink type="http" url="http://fink.sourceforge.net"> The Fink
 | 
						|
          project</ulink> has ported <ulink type="http"
 | 
						|
          url="http://fink.sourceforge.net/pdb/package.php/gramps"> some older
 | 
						|
          versions</ulink> of GRAMPS to OSX (tm). The Mac OSX port is not
 | 
						|
          directly supported by the GRAMPS project, primarily because none of
 | 
						|
          the GRAMPS developers have access to Mac OSX and because OSX is not
 | 
						|
          Free Software.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>This version of GRAMPS (2.2.0) does not appear to have been
 | 
						|
          ported by the Fink project. Please contact the Fink project for more
 | 
						|
          information.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Some people have had success using the DarwinPorts instead of
 | 
						|
          the Fink project.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Does it work with KDE?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Yes, as long as the required GNOME libraries are
 | 
						|
          installed.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Do I really have to have GNOME installed?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Yes, but you do not have to be running the GNOME
 | 
						|
          desktop.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>What version of GNOME do I need?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>This version of gramps requires GNOME 2.8.0 or higher.
 | 
						|
          Previous versions in 1.0.x series required GNOME 2.0.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Is GRAMPS compatible with other genealogical software?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>GRAMPS makes every effort to maintain compatibility with
 | 
						|
          GEDCOM, the general standard of recording genealogical information.
 | 
						|
          We have import and export filters that enable GRAMPS to read and
 | 
						|
          write GEDCOM files.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>It is important to understand that the GEDCOM standard is
 | 
						|
          poorly implemented -- virtually every genealogical software has its
 | 
						|
          own "flavor" of GEDCOM. As we learn about new flavor, the
 | 
						|
          import/export filters can be created very quickly. However, finding
 | 
						|
          out about the unknown flavors requires user feedback. Please feel
 | 
						|
          free to inform us about any GEDCOM flavor not supported by GRAMPS,
 | 
						|
          and we will do our best to support it!</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Can GRAMPS read files created by other genealogy
 | 
						|
        programs?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>See above.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Can GRAMPS write files readable by other genealogy
 | 
						|
        programs?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>See above.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Can GRAMPS print a genealogical tree for my family?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Yes. Different people have different ideas of what a
 | 
						|
          genealogical tree is. Some think of it as a chart going from the
 | 
						|
          distant ancestor and listing all his/her descendants and their
 | 
						|
          families. Others think it should be a chart going from the person
 | 
						|
          back in time, listing the ancestors and their families. Yet other
 | 
						|
          people think of a table, text report, etc.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>GRAMPS can produce any of the above, and many more different
 | 
						|
          charts and reports. Moreover, the plugin architecture enables users
 | 
						|
          (you) to create their own plugins which could be new reports,
 | 
						|
          charts, or research tools.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>In what formats can GRAMPS output its reports?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Text reports are available in HTML, PDF, AbiWord, KWord,
 | 
						|
          LaTeX, RTF, and OpenOffice formats. Graphical reports (charts and
 | 
						|
          diagrams) are available in PostScript, PDF, SVG, OpenOffice, and
 | 
						|
          GraphViz formats.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Is GRAMPS compatible with the Internet?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>GRAMPS can store web addresses and direct your browser to
 | 
						|
          them. It can import data that you download from the Internet. It can
 | 
						|
          export data that you could send over the Internet. GRAMPS is
 | 
						|
          familiar with the standard file formats widely used on the Internet
 | 
						|
          (e.g. JPEG, PNG, and GIF images, MP3, OGG, and WAV sound files,
 | 
						|
          QuickTime, MPEG, and AVI movie files, etc). Other than that, there
 | 
						|
          is little that a genealogical program can do with the
 | 
						|
          Internet.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Can I create custom reports/filters/whatever?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Yes. There are many levels of customization. One is creating
 | 
						|
          or modifying the templates used for the reports. This gives you some
 | 
						|
          control over the fonts, colors, and some layout of the reports. You
 | 
						|
          can also use GRAMPS controls in the report dialogs to tell what
 | 
						|
          contents should be used for a particular report. In addition to
 | 
						|
          this, you have an ability to create your own filters -- this is
 | 
						|
          useful in selecting people based on criteria set by you. You can
 | 
						|
          combine these filters to create new, more complex filters. Finally,
 | 
						|
          you have an option to create your own plugins. These may be new
 | 
						|
          reports, research tools, import/export filters, etc. This assumes
 | 
						|
          some knowledge of programming in Python.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>What standards does GRAMPS support?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>The nice thing about standards is that there never is a
 | 
						|
          shortage of them. GRAMPS is tested to support the following flavors
 | 
						|
          of GEDCOM: GEDCOM5.5, Brother's Keeper, Family Origins, Family Tree
 | 
						|
          Maker, Ftree, GeneWeb, Legacy, Personal Ancestral File, Pro-Gen,
 | 
						|
          Reunion, and Visual Genealogie.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>What is the maximum database size (bytes) GRAMPS can
 | 
						|
        handle?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>GRAMPS has no hard limits on the size of a database that it
 | 
						|
          can handle. Starting with this release, GRAMPS no longer loads all
 | 
						|
          data into memory, which allows it to work with a much larger
 | 
						|
          database than before. In reality, however, there are practical
 | 
						|
          limits. The main limiting factors are the available memory on the
 | 
						|
          system and the cache size used for BSDDB database access. With
 | 
						|
          common memory sizes these days, GRAMPS should have no problem using
 | 
						|
          databases with tens of thousands of people.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>How many people can GRAMPS database handle?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>We have found that on a typical system, GRAMPS tends to bog
 | 
						|
          down after the database has around 150,000 people. Again, this is
 | 
						|
          dependent on how much memory you have.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Why is GRAMPS running so slowly?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>It does not anymore! Just try out the current version,
 | 
						|
          2.2.0.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>My database is really big. Is there a way around loading all the
 | 
						|
        data into memory?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Starting with this release, GRAMPS no longer loads all data
 | 
						|
          into memory, which allows it to work with a much larger database
 | 
						|
          than before.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>I want to rerun the Startup dialog. How do I do this?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>GRAMPS keeps a flag in the GNOME configuration database to
 | 
						|
          indicate that the startup dialog has been run. To cause GRAMPS to
 | 
						|
          rerun this, the flag needs to be reset. This can be done with the
 | 
						|
          following command:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para><command>gconftool-2 -u
 | 
						|
          /apps/gramps/behavior/startup</command></para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Why are non-latin characters displayed as garbage in PDF/PS
 | 
						|
        reports?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>This is a limitation of the builtin fonts of PS and PDF
 | 
						|
          formats. To print non-latin text, use the Print... in the format
 | 
						|
          selection menu of the report dialog. This will use the gnome-print
 | 
						|
          backend, which supports PS and PDF creation, as well as direct
 | 
						|
          printing.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>If you only have latin text, the PDF option will produce a
 | 
						|
          smalled PDF compared to that created by gnome-print, simply because
 | 
						|
          no font information will be embedded.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>Why can I not add/remove/edit columns to the lists in People
 | 
						|
        View and Family View?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Now you can! Just try out the current version, 2.2.0.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>I would like to contribute to GRAMPS by writing my favorite
 | 
						|
        report. How do I do that?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>The easiest way to contribute to reports, filters, tools, etc.
 | 
						|
          is to copy an existing GRAMPS report, filter, or tool. If you can
 | 
						|
          create what you want by modifying existing code -- great! If your
 | 
						|
          idea does not fit into the logic of any existing GRAMPS tool, the
 | 
						|
          <ulink type="http"
 | 
						|
          url="http://gramps.sourceforge.net/phpwiki/index.php/GrampsDevelopersPage">following
 | 
						|
          page</ulink> may provide some help in writing your own plugin from
 | 
						|
          scratch.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>If you need more help or would like to discuss your idea with
 | 
						|
          us, please do not hesitate to contact us at <ulink type="mailto"
 | 
						|
          url="mailto:gramps-devel@lists.sf.net">gramps-devel@lists.sf.net</ulink></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>To test your work in progress, you may save your plugin under
 | 
						|
          <replaceable>$HOME/.gramps/plugins</replaceable> directory and it
 | 
						|
          should be found and imported on startup. The correctly written
 | 
						|
          plugin will register itself with GRAMPS, create menu item, and so
 | 
						|
          on.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>If you are happy with your plugin and would like to contribute
 | 
						|
          your code back to the GRAMPS project, you are very welcome to do so
 | 
						|
          by contacting us at <ulink type="mailto"
 | 
						|
          url="mailto:gramps-devel@lists.sf.net">gramps-devel@lists.sf.net</ulink></para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>I found a bug and I want it fixed right now! What do I
 | 
						|
        do?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>The best thing you can do is to fix the bug and send the patch
 | 
						|
          to <ulink type="mailto"
 | 
						|
          url="mailto:gramps-devel@lists.sf.net">gramps-devel@lists.sf.net</ulink>
 | 
						|
          :-)</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>A good bug report would include:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Version of gramps you were using when you encountered the
 | 
						|
              bug (available through <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                  <guisubmenu>Help</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <guimenuitem>About</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
                </menuchoice> menu item).</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Language under which gramps was run (available by
 | 
						|
              executing</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para><command>echo $LANG</command></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>in your terminal).</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Symptoms indicating that this is indeed a bug.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Any Traceback messages, error messages, warnings, etc,
 | 
						|
              that showed up in your terminal or a in separate traceback
 | 
						|
              window.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>Most problems can be fixed quickly provided there is enough
 | 
						|
          information. To ensure this, please follow up on your bug reports.
 | 
						|
          In particular, if you file a bug report with sf.net bug tracker,
 | 
						|
          PLEASE log in to sf.net before filing (register your free account if
 | 
						|
          you don't have one). Then we will have a way of contacting you
 | 
						|
          should we need more information. If you choose to file your report
 | 
						|
          anonymously, at least check every so often whether your report page
 | 
						|
          has something new posted, as it probably would.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>If the above explanations seem vague, please follow <ulink
 | 
						|
          type="http"
 | 
						|
          url="http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/bugs.html">this
 | 
						|
          link.</ulink></para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        <term>It is obvious that GRAMPS absolutely needs to become a
 | 
						|
        (client-server/web-based/PHP/weblog/Javascript/C++/distributed/KDE/Motif/Tcl/Win32/C#/You-name-it)
 | 
						|
        application. When is this going to happen?</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>The surest way to see it happen is to get it done by yourself.
 | 
						|
          Since GRAMPS is free/open source, nobody prevents you from taking
 | 
						|
          all of the code and continuing its development in whatever direction
 | 
						|
          you see fit. In doing so, you may consider giving your new project
 | 
						|
          another name to avoid confusion with the continuing GRAMPS
 | 
						|
          development. If you would like the GRAMPS project to provide advice,
 | 
						|
          expertise, filters, etc., we will gladly cooperate with your new
 | 
						|
          project, to ensure compatibility or import/export options to your
 | 
						|
          new format of a project.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <para>If, however, you would like the GRAMPS project to to adopt
 | 
						|
          your strategy, you would need to convince GRAMPS developers that
 | 
						|
          your strategy is good for GRAMPS and superior to the present
 | 
						|
          development strategy.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
    </variablelist>
 | 
						|
  </appendix>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <appendix id="append-keybind">
 | 
						|
    <!-- $Id$ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <title>Keybindings reference</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>Most of the standard menu items define equivalent keybindings. These
 | 
						|
    are apparent because they are displayed on the right of the menu item.
 | 
						|
    However, some keybindings are not associated with any items in the
 | 
						|
    menu.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>This appendix contains the list of keybindings that are not
 | 
						|
    displayed in menus of GRAMPS.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="keybind-lists">
 | 
						|
      <title>List Views</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>The following bindings are available in all list views: People
 | 
						|
      View, Sources View, Places View, and Media View.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <informaltable frame="topbot">
 | 
						|
        <tgroup cols="2">
 | 
						|
          <colspec colname="col1" />
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <colspec colname="col2" />
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <thead>
 | 
						|
            <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
              <entry colname="col1" colsep="0"
 | 
						|
              valign="top"><para>Key</para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <entry colname="col2" valign="top"><para>Function</para></entry>
 | 
						|
            </row>
 | 
						|
          </thead>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <tbody>
 | 
						|
            <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
              <entry><para><keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <entry><para>Invoke <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog with
 | 
						|
              the selected person.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
            </row>
 | 
						|
          </tbody>
 | 
						|
        </tgroup>
 | 
						|
      </informaltable>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="keybind-family">
 | 
						|
      <title>Family View</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>The bindings available in the Family View depend on where the
 | 
						|
      focus is. The following tables list the bindings for all focus
 | 
						|
      targets.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Focus on the Active Person</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <informaltable frame="topbot">
 | 
						|
              <tgroup cols="2">
 | 
						|
                <colspec colname="col1" />
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <colspec colname="col2" />
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <thead>
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry colname="col1" colsep="0"
 | 
						|
                    valign="top"><para>Key</para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry colname="col2"
 | 
						|
                    valign="top"><para>Function</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
                </thead>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <tbody>
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Invoke <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel>
 | 
						|
                    dialog with the active person.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Down</keycap>
 | 
						|
                    or
 | 
						|
                    <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Right</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Swap the Active Person and the selected
 | 
						|
                    spouse. Use <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Down</keycap> in
 | 
						|
                    standard Family View and
 | 
						|
                    <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Right</keycap> in
 | 
						|
                    alternative Family View.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
                </tbody>
 | 
						|
              </tgroup>
 | 
						|
            </informaltable>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Focus on the Spouse box</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <informaltable frame="topbot">
 | 
						|
              <tgroup cols="2">
 | 
						|
                <colspec colname="col1" />
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <colspec colname="col2" />
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <thead>
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry colname="col1" colsep="0"
 | 
						|
                    valign="top"><para>Key</para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry colname="col2"
 | 
						|
                    valign="top"><para>Function</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
                </thead>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <tbody>
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Edit relationship between the Active Person
 | 
						|
                    and the selected spouse.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Shift</keycap>+<keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Edit the personal information for the
 | 
						|
                    selected spouse.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Add a person from the database to the spouse
 | 
						|
                    list.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Shift</keycap>+<keycap>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Add a new person to the database and to the
 | 
						|
                    spouse list.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Delete</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Delete the selected spouse from the spouse
 | 
						|
                    list. The spouse is not deleted from the
 | 
						|
                    database.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Up</keycap> or
 | 
						|
                    <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Left</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Swap the selected spouse and the Active
 | 
						|
                    Person. Use <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Up</keycap> in
 | 
						|
                    standard Family View and
 | 
						|
                    <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Left</keycap> in alternative
 | 
						|
                    Family View.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
                </tbody>
 | 
						|
              </tgroup>
 | 
						|
            </informaltable>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Focus on the Parents box</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <informaltable frame="topbot">
 | 
						|
              <tgroup cols="2">
 | 
						|
                <colspec colname="col1" />
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <colspec colname="col2" />
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <thead>
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry colname="col1" colsep="0"
 | 
						|
                    valign="top"><para>Key</para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry colname="col2"
 | 
						|
                    valign="top"><para>Function</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
                </thead>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <tbody>
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Edit relationship between the parents and
 | 
						|
                    their child (either the Active Person or the selected
 | 
						|
                    spouse, depending which parents box the focus is
 | 
						|
                    in).</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Add a new set of parents from the database to
 | 
						|
                    the list.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Shift</keycap>+<keycap>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Add a new set of parents to the database and
 | 
						|
                    to the list.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Delete</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Delete the selected parents from the list.
 | 
						|
                    The parents are not deleted from the
 | 
						|
                    database.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Right</keycap>
 | 
						|
                    or
 | 
						|
                    <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Down</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Make the selected parents the active family.
 | 
						|
                    Use <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Right</keycap> in
 | 
						|
                    standard Family View and
 | 
						|
                    <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Down</keycap> in alternative
 | 
						|
                    Family View.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
                </tbody>
 | 
						|
              </tgroup>
 | 
						|
            </informaltable>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Focus on the Children box</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <informaltable frame="topbot">
 | 
						|
              <tgroup cols="2">
 | 
						|
                <colspec colname="col1" />
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <colspec colname="col2" />
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <thead>
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry colname="col1" colsep="0"
 | 
						|
                    valign="top"><para>Key</para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry colname="col2"
 | 
						|
                    valign="top"><para>Function</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
                </thead>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <tbody>
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Edit relationship between the child and
 | 
						|
                    his/her parents (the Active Person and the selected
 | 
						|
                    spouse).</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Shift</keycap>+<keycap>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Edit the personal information for the
 | 
						|
                    selected child.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Add a new person from the database to the
 | 
						|
                    children list.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Shift</keycap>+<keycap>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Add a new person to the database and to the
 | 
						|
                    children list.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Delete</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Delete the selected child from the list. The
 | 
						|
                    child is not deleted from the database.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <row valign="top">
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para><keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Left</keycap>
 | 
						|
                    or
 | 
						|
                    <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Up</keycap></para></entry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                    <entry><para>Make the selected child the Active Person.
 | 
						|
                    Use <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Left</keycap> in
 | 
						|
                    standard Family View and
 | 
						|
                    <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Up</keycap> in alternative
 | 
						|
                    Family View.</para></entry>
 | 
						|
                  </row>
 | 
						|
                </tbody>
 | 
						|
              </tgroup>
 | 
						|
            </informaltable>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
  </appendix>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <appendix id="append-filtref">
 | 
						|
    <!-- $Id$ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <title>Filter rules reference</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>This appendix lists of all the filter rules currently defined in
 | 
						|
    GRAMPS. Each of these rules is available for use when creating custom
 | 
						|
    filters, see <xref linkend="tools-util-cfe" />. The rules are listed by
 | 
						|
    their categories.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- =============== Appendices Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="filtref-general">
 | 
						|
      <title>General filters</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>This category includes the following most general rules:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has complete record</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches all people whose records are marked as
 | 
						|
            complete. Currently, the completeness of personal information is
 | 
						|
            marked manually, in the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel>
 | 
						|
            dialog.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>People with incomplete names</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches all people with either given name or
 | 
						|
            family name missing.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is bookmarked person</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches all people who are on the bookmark
 | 
						|
            list.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has text matching substring of</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches all people whose records contain specified
 | 
						|
            substring. All textual records are searched. Optionally, the
 | 
						|
            search can be made case sensitive, or a regular expression
 | 
						|
            match.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Everyone</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches any person in the database. As such it is
 | 
						|
            not very useful on its own except for testing purposes. However,
 | 
						|
            it may be useful in combinations with other rules.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>People probably alive</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches all people whose records do not indicate
 | 
						|
            their death and who are not unreasonably old, judging by their
 | 
						|
            available birth data and today's date.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has a name</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches any person whose name matches the
 | 
						|
            specified value in full or in part. For example, Marta Ericsdotter
 | 
						|
            will be matched by the rule using the value "eric" for the family
 | 
						|
            name.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>Separate values can be used for Given name, Family name,
 | 
						|
            Suffix, and the Title. The rule returns a match if, and only if,
 | 
						|
            all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's name.
 | 
						|
            To use just one value, leave the other values empty.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has the Id</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches any person with a specified GRAMPS ID. The
 | 
						|
            rule returns a match only if the ID is matched exactly.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
 | 
						|
            select a person from the list by clicking
 | 
						|
            <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button. In the latter case, the
 | 
						|
            ID will appear in the text field after the selection was
 | 
						|
            made.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is default person</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches the default (home) person.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>People marked private</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people whose records are marked as
 | 
						|
            private.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is a female</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches any female person.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>People who have images</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people with images in their
 | 
						|
            galleries.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>People without a birth date</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people missing birth date.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is a male</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches any male person.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- =============== Appendices Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="filtref-event">
 | 
						|
      <title>Event filters</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>This category includes the following rules that match people based
 | 
						|
      on their recorded events:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has the birth</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people whose birth event matches specified
 | 
						|
            values for Date, Place, and Description. The rule returns a match
 | 
						|
            even if the person's birth event matches the value partially. The
 | 
						|
            matching rules are case-insensitive. For example, anyone born in
 | 
						|
            Sweden will be matched by the rule using the value "sw" for the
 | 
						|
            Place.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty
 | 
						|
            values are (partially) matched by a person's birth. To use just
 | 
						|
            one value, leave the other values empty.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has the death</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people whose death event matches specified
 | 
						|
            values for Date, Place, and Description. The rule returns a match
 | 
						|
            even if the person's death event matches the value partially. The
 | 
						|
            matching rules are case-insensitive. For example, anyone who died
 | 
						|
            in Sweden will be matched by the rule using the value "sw" for the
 | 
						|
            Place.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty
 | 
						|
            values are (partially) matched by a person's death. To use just
 | 
						|
            one value, leave the other values empty.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has source of</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people whose records refer to the
 | 
						|
            specified source.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has the personal event</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people that have a personal event matching
 | 
						|
            specified values for the Event type, Date, Place, and Description.
 | 
						|
            The rule returns a match even if the person's event matches the
 | 
						|
            value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive. For
 | 
						|
            example, anyone who graduated in Sweden will be matched by the
 | 
						|
            rule using the Graduation event and the value "sw" for the
 | 
						|
            Place.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>The personal events should be selected from a pull-down
 | 
						|
            menu. The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty
 | 
						|
            values are (partially) matched by the personal event. To use just
 | 
						|
            one value, leave the other values empty.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has the family event</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people that have a family event matching
 | 
						|
            specified values for the Event type, Date, Place, and Description.
 | 
						|
            The rule returns a match even if the person's event matches the
 | 
						|
            value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive. For
 | 
						|
            example, anyone who was married in Sweden will be matched by the
 | 
						|
            rule using the Marriage event and the value "sw" for the
 | 
						|
            Place.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>The family events should be selected from a pull-down menu.
 | 
						|
            The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values are
 | 
						|
            (partially) matched by the personal event. To use just one value,
 | 
						|
            leave the other values empty.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Witness</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who are present as a witness in the
 | 
						|
            event. If the personal or family event type is specified, only the
 | 
						|
            events of this type will be searched.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>People with incomplete events</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people missing date or place in any
 | 
						|
            personal event.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Families with incomplete events</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people missing date or place in any family
 | 
						|
            event of any of their families.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- =============== Appendices Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="filtref-family">
 | 
						|
      <title>Family filters</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>This category includes the following rules that match people based
 | 
						|
      on their family relationships:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>People with children</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people with children.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>People with multiple marriage records</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people with more than one spouse.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>People with no marriage records</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people with no spouses.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>People who were adopted</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches adopted people.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has the relationships</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people with a particular relationship. The
 | 
						|
            relationship must match the type selected from the menu.
 | 
						|
            Optionally, the number of relationships and the number of children
 | 
						|
            can be specified.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty
 | 
						|
            values are (partially) matched by a person's relationship. To use
 | 
						|
            just one value, leave the other values empty.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is spouse of filter match</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people married to someone who is matched
 | 
						|
            by the specified filter. The specified filter name should be
 | 
						|
            selected from the menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is a child of filter match</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people for whom either parent is matched
 | 
						|
            by the specified filter. The specified filter name should be
 | 
						|
            selected from the menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is a parent of filter match</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people whose child is matched by the
 | 
						|
            specified filter. The specified filter name should be selected
 | 
						|
            from the menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is a sibling of filter match</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people whose sibling is matched by the
 | 
						|
            specified filter. The specified filter name should be selected
 | 
						|
            from the menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- =============== Appendices Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="filtref-ancestral">
 | 
						|
      <title>Ancestral filters</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>This category includes the following rules that match people based
 | 
						|
      on their ancestral relations to other people:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is an ancestor of</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who are ancestors of the specified
 | 
						|
            person. The Inclusive option determines whether the specified
 | 
						|
            person should be considered his/her own ancestor (useful for
 | 
						|
            building reports).</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
 | 
						|
            select a person from the list by clicking
 | 
						|
            <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button. In the latter case, the
 | 
						|
            ID will appear in the text field after the selection was
 | 
						|
            made.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is an ancestor of person at least N generations away</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who are ancestors of the specified
 | 
						|
            person and are at least N generations away from that person in
 | 
						|
            their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2
 | 
						|
            for the number of generations will match grandparents,
 | 
						|
            great-grandparents, etc., but not the parents of the specified
 | 
						|
            person.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is an ancestor of person not more than N generations
 | 
						|
          away</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who are ancestors of the specified
 | 
						|
            person and are no more than N generations away from that person in
 | 
						|
            their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2
 | 
						|
            for the number of generations will match parents and grandparents,
 | 
						|
            but not great-grandparents, etc., of the specified person.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has a common ancestor with</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who have common ancestors with the
 | 
						|
            specified person.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has a common ancestor with filter match</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who have common ancestors with
 | 
						|
            someone who is matched by the specified filter. The specified
 | 
						|
            filter name should be selected from the menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is an ancestor of filter match</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who are ancestors of someone who is
 | 
						|
            matched by the specified filter. The specified filter name should
 | 
						|
            be selected from the menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- =============== Appendices Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="filtref-descendant">
 | 
						|
      <title>Descendant filters</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>This category includes the following rules that match people based
 | 
						|
      on their descendant relations to other people:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is a descendant of</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who are descendants of the
 | 
						|
            specified person. The Inclusive option determines whether the
 | 
						|
            specified person should be considered his/her own descendant
 | 
						|
            (useful for building reports).</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
 | 
						|
            select a person from the list by clicking
 | 
						|
            <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button. In the latter case, the
 | 
						|
            ID will appear in the text field after the selection was
 | 
						|
            made.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is a descendant of person at least N generations away</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who are descendants of the
 | 
						|
            specified person and are at least N generations away from that
 | 
						|
            person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the
 | 
						|
            value of 2 for the number of generations will match grandchildren,
 | 
						|
            great-grandchildren, etc., but not the children of the specified
 | 
						|
            person.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is a descendant of person not more than N generations
 | 
						|
          away</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who are descendants of the
 | 
						|
            specified person and are no more than N generations away from that
 | 
						|
            person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the
 | 
						|
            value of 2 for the number of generations will match children and
 | 
						|
            grandchildren, but not great-grandchildren, etc., of the specified
 | 
						|
            person.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is a descendant of filter match</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who are descendants of someone who
 | 
						|
            is matched by the specified filter. The specified filter name
 | 
						|
            should be selected from the menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Is a descendant family member of</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule not only matches people who are descendants of the
 | 
						|
            specified person, but also those descendants' spouses.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- =============== Appendices Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="filtref-relat">
 | 
						|
      <title>Relationship filters</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>This category includes the following rules that match people based
 | 
						|
      on their mutual relationship:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Relationship path between two people</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches all ancestors of both people back to their
 | 
						|
            common ancestors (if exist). This produces the "relationship path"
 | 
						|
            between these two people, through their common ancestors.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <para>You can either enter the ID of each person into the
 | 
						|
            appropriate text entry fields, or select people from the list by
 | 
						|
            clicking their <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> buttons. In the
 | 
						|
            latter case, the ID will appear in the text field after the
 | 
						|
            selection was made.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- =============== Appendices Sub-subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="filtref-misc">
 | 
						|
      <title>Miscellaneous filters</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>This category includes the following rules which do not naturally
 | 
						|
      fit into any of the above categories:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has the personal attribute</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who have the personal attribute of
 | 
						|
            the specified value. The specified personal attribute name should
 | 
						|
            be selected from the menu. The specified value should be typed
 | 
						|
            into the text entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Has the family attribute</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who have the family attribute of
 | 
						|
            the specified value. The specified family attribute should be
 | 
						|
            selected from the menu. The specified value should be typed into
 | 
						|
            the text entry field.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Matches the filter named</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>This rule matches people who are matched by the specified
 | 
						|
            filter. The specified filter name should be selected from the
 | 
						|
            menu.</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
  </appendix>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <appendix id="append-cmdline">
 | 
						|
    <!-- $Id$ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!-- =============== Appendices Subsection ================ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <title>Command line reference</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>This appendix provides the reference to the command line
 | 
						|
    capabilities available when launching GRAMPS from the terminal.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <note>
 | 
						|
      <para>GRAMPS was designed to be an interactive program. Therefore it
 | 
						|
      uses graphical display and cannot run from the true non-graphical
 | 
						|
      console. It would take an enormous amount of effort to enable it to run
 | 
						|
      in a text-only terminal. This is why the set of command line options
 | 
						|
      does not aim to completely get rid of dependency on the graphical
 | 
						|
      display. Rather, it merely makes certain (typical) tasks more
 | 
						|
      convenient. It also allows one to execute these tasks from the scripts.
 | 
						|
      However, the graphical display must be accessible at all times!</para>
 | 
						|
    </note>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <tip>
 | 
						|
      <para>To summarize, the use of the command line options provides
 | 
						|
      non-interactive behavior, but does not get rid of graphical display
 | 
						|
      dependency. Take it or leave it!</para>
 | 
						|
    </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="cmdline-options">
 | 
						|
      <title>Available options</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <para>This section provides the reference list of all command line
 | 
						|
      options available in GRAMPS. If you want to know more than just a list
 | 
						|
      of options, see next sections: <xref linkend="cmdline-operation" /> and
 | 
						|
      <xref linkend="cmdline-examples" />.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="cmdline-opt-format">
 | 
						|
        <title>Format options</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The format of any file destined for opening, importing, or
 | 
						|
        exporting can be specified with the <command>-f
 | 
						|
        <replaceable>format</replaceable></command> option. The acceptable
 | 
						|
        <replaceable>format</replaceable> values are listed below.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>grdb</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>GRAMPS database. This format is available for opening,
 | 
						|
              import, and export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the
 | 
						|
              filename ends with .grdb</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>gramps-xml</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>GRAMPS XML database. This format is available for opening,
 | 
						|
              import, and export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the
 | 
						|
              filename ends with .gramps</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>gedcom</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>GEDCOM file. This format is available for opening, import,
 | 
						|
              and export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the
 | 
						|
              filename ends with .ged</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>gramps-pkg</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>GRAMPS package. This format is available for import and
 | 
						|
              export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the filename
 | 
						|
              ends with .gpkg</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>geneweb</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>GeneWen file This format is available for import and
 | 
						|
              export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the filename
 | 
						|
              ends with .gw</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>wft</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>Web Family Tree. This format is available for export only.
 | 
						|
              When not specified, it can be guessed if the filename ends with
 | 
						|
              .wft</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>iso</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>CD image. This format is available for export only. It
 | 
						|
              must always be specified explicitly.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="cmdline-opt-open">
 | 
						|
        <title>Opening options</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>There are two ways to give GRAMPS the name of the file to be
 | 
						|
        opened:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>supply bare file name</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para>use the <command>-O <filename>filename</filename></command>
 | 
						|
            or <command>-open=<filename>filename</filename></command>
 | 
						|
            option</para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>If the filename is given without any option flag, the attempt to
 | 
						|
        open the file will be made, and then the interactive GRAMPS session
 | 
						|
        will be launched.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>If no option is given, just the file name, GRAMPS will ignore
 | 
						|
          the rest of the command line arguments. Use the -O flag to open the
 | 
						|
          file and do something with the data.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The format can be specified with the <command>-f
 | 
						|
        <replaceable>format</replaceable></command> or
 | 
						|
        <command>--format=<replaceable>format</replaceable></command> option,
 | 
						|
        immediately following the <filename>filename</filename>. If not
 | 
						|
        specified, the guess will be attempted based on the
 | 
						|
        <filename>filename</filename>.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>Only grdb, gramps-xml, and gedcom formats can be opened
 | 
						|
          directly. For other formats, you will need to use the import option
 | 
						|
          which will set up the empty database and then import data into
 | 
						|
          it.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>Only a single file can be opened. If you need to combine data
 | 
						|
          from several sources, you will need to use the import option.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="cmdline-opt-import">
 | 
						|
        <title>Import options</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The files destined for import can be specified with the
 | 
						|
        <command>-i <filename>filename</filename></command> or
 | 
						|
        <command>--import=<filename>filename</filename></command> option. The
 | 
						|
        format can be specified with the <command>-f
 | 
						|
        <replaceable>format</replaceable></command> or
 | 
						|
        <command>--format=<replaceable>format</replaceable></command> option,
 | 
						|
        immediately following the <filename>filename</filename>. If not
 | 
						|
        specified, the guess will be attempted based on the
 | 
						|
        <filename>filename</filename>.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>More than one file can be imported in one command. If this is
 | 
						|
          the case, GRAMPS will incorporate the data from the next file into
 | 
						|
          the database available at the moment.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>When more than one input file is given, each has to be preceded
 | 
						|
        by <command>-i</command> flag. The files are imported in the specified
 | 
						|
        order, i.e. <command> -i <filename>file1</filename> -i
 | 
						|
        <filename>file2</filename> </command> and <command> -i
 | 
						|
        <filename>file2</filename> -i <filename>file1</filename> </command>
 | 
						|
        might produce different GRAMPS IDs in the resulting database.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="cmdline-opt-export">
 | 
						|
        <title>Export options</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The files destined for export can be specified with the
 | 
						|
        <command>-o <filename>filename</filename></command> or
 | 
						|
        <command>--output=<filename>filename</filename></command> option. The
 | 
						|
        format can be specified with the <command>-f</command> option
 | 
						|
        immediately following the <filename>filename</filename>. If not
 | 
						|
        specified, the guess will be attempted based on the
 | 
						|
        <filename>filename</filename>. For iso format, the
 | 
						|
        <filename>filename</filename> is actually the name of directory the
 | 
						|
        GRAMPS database will be written into. For grdb, gramps-xml, gedcom,
 | 
						|
        wft, geneweb, and gramps-pkg, the <filename>filename</filename> is the
 | 
						|
        name of the resulting file.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <tip>
 | 
						|
          <para>More than one file can be exported in one command. If this is
 | 
						|
          the case, GRAMPS will attempt to write several files using the data
 | 
						|
          from the database available at the moment.</para>
 | 
						|
        </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>When more than one output file is given, each has to be preceded
 | 
						|
        by <command>-o</command> flag. The files are written one by one, in
 | 
						|
        the specified order.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <sect2 id="cmdline-opt-action">
 | 
						|
        <title>Action options</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>The action to perform on the imported data can be specified with
 | 
						|
        the <command>-a <replaceable>action</replaceable></command> or
 | 
						|
        <command>--action=<replaceable>action</replaceable></command> option.
 | 
						|
        This is done after all imports are successfully completed.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>Currently available actions are:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <variablelist>
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>summary</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This action is the same as <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                  <guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <guisubmenu>View</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <guimenuitem>Summary</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
                </menuchoice></para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>check</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This action is the same as <menuchoice>
 | 
						|
                  <guimenu>Tools</guimenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <guisubmenu>Database Processing</guisubmenu>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <guimenuitem>Check and Repair</guimenuitem>
 | 
						|
                </menuchoice>.</para>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
            <term>report</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <listitem>
 | 
						|
              <para>This action allows producing reports from the command
 | 
						|
              line. As reports generally have many options of their own, this
 | 
						|
              action should be followed by the report option string. The
 | 
						|
              string is given using the <command>-p
 | 
						|
              <replaceable>option_string</replaceable></command> or
 | 
						|
              <command>--options=<replaceable>option_string</replaceable></command>
 | 
						|
              option.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <tip>
 | 
						|
                <para>The report option string should satisfy the following
 | 
						|
                conditions:</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>It must not contain any spaces. If some arguments
 | 
						|
                    need to include spaces, the string should be enclosed with
 | 
						|
                    quotation marks.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>Option string must list pairs of option names and
 | 
						|
                    values.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>Within a pair, option name and value must be
 | 
						|
                    separated by the equal sign.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>Different pairs must be separated by commas.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
                </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
              </tip>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>Most of the report options are specific for every report.
 | 
						|
              However, there some common options.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <variablelist>
 | 
						|
                <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
                  <term>name=report_name</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>This mandatory option determines which report will
 | 
						|
                    be generated. If the supplied report_name does not
 | 
						|
                    correspond to any available report, the error message will
 | 
						|
                    be printed followed by the list of available
 | 
						|
                    reports.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
                </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
                  <term>show=all</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>This will produce the list of names for all options
 | 
						|
                    available for a given report.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
                </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
                  <term>show=option_name</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
                  <listitem>
 | 
						|
                    <para>This will print the description of the functionality
 | 
						|
                    supplied by the option_name, as well as what are the
 | 
						|
                    acceptable types and values for this option.</para>
 | 
						|
                  </listitem>
 | 
						|
                </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
              </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>Use the above options to find out everything about a given
 | 
						|
              report.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <tip>
 | 
						|
                <para>If an option is not supplied, the last used value will
 | 
						|
                be used. If this report has never been generated before, then
 | 
						|
                the value from last generated report will be used when
 | 
						|
                applicable. Otherwise, the default value will be used.</para>
 | 
						|
              </tip>
 | 
						|
            </listitem>
 | 
						|
          </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
        </variablelist>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <para>When more than one output action is given, each has to be
 | 
						|
        preceded by <command>-a</command> flag. The actions are performed one
 | 
						|
        by one, in the specified order.</para>
 | 
						|
      </sect2>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <!--       &cmdplug; -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="cmdline-operation">
 | 
						|
      <title>Operation</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>If the first argument on the command line does not start with
 | 
						|
          dash (i.e. no flag), GRAMPS will attempt to open the file with the
 | 
						|
          name given by the first argument and start interactive session,
 | 
						|
          ignoring the rest of the command line arguments.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>If the <command>-O</command> flag is given, then GRAMPS will
 | 
						|
          try opening the supplied file name and then work with that data, as
 | 
						|
          instructed by the further command line parameters.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <note>
 | 
						|
            <para>Only one file can be opened in a single invocation of
 | 
						|
            GRAMPS. If you need to get data from multiple sources, use the
 | 
						|
            importing options by using <command>-i</command> flag.</para>
 | 
						|
          </note>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>With or without the <command>-O</command> flag, there could be
 | 
						|
          multiple imports, exports, and actions specified further on the
 | 
						|
          command line by using <command>-i</command>, <command>-o</command>,
 | 
						|
          and <command>-a</command> flags.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>The order of <command>-i</command>, <command>-o</command>, or
 | 
						|
          <command>-a</command> options with respect to each does not matter.
 | 
						|
          The actual execution order always is: all imports (if any) -> all
 | 
						|
          exports (if any) -> all actions (if any).</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <note>
 | 
						|
            <para>But opening must always be first!</para>
 | 
						|
          </note>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>If no <command>-O</command> or <command>-i</command> option is
 | 
						|
          given, GRAMPS will launch its main window and start the usual
 | 
						|
          interactive session with the empty database, since there is no data
 | 
						|
          to process, anyway.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>If no <command>-o</command> or <command>-a</command> options
 | 
						|
          are given, GRAMPS will launch its main window and start the usual
 | 
						|
          interactive session with the database resulted from opening and all
 | 
						|
          imports (if any). This database resides in the
 | 
						|
          <filename>import_db.grdb</filename> file under the
 | 
						|
          <filename>~/.gramps/import/</filename> directory.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Any errors encountered during import, export, or action, will
 | 
						|
          be either dumped to stdout (if these are exceptions handled by
 | 
						|
          GRAMPS) or or to stderr (if these are not handled). Use usual shell
 | 
						|
          redirections of stdout and stderr to save messages and errors in
 | 
						|
          files.</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <sect1 id="cmdline-examples">
 | 
						|
      <title>Examples</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      <variablelist>
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>To import four databases (whose formats can be determined from
 | 
						|
          their names) and then check the resulting database for errors, one
 | 
						|
          may type:</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para><command>gramps -i<filename>file1.ged</filename> -i
 | 
						|
            <filename>file2.gpkg</filename> -i
 | 
						|
            <filename>~/db3.gramps</filename> -i
 | 
						|
            <filename>file4.wft</filename> -a
 | 
						|
            <filename>check</filename></command></para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>To explicitly specify the formats in the above example, append
 | 
						|
          filenames with appropriate <command>-f</command> options:</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para><command>gramps -i <filename>file1.ged</filename> -f
 | 
						|
            <replaceable>gedcom</replaceable> -i
 | 
						|
            <filename>file2.gpkg</filename> -f
 | 
						|
            <replaceable>gramps-pkg</replaceable> -i
 | 
						|
            <filename>~/db3.gramps</filename> -f
 | 
						|
            <replaceable>gramps-xml</replaceable> -i
 | 
						|
            <filename>file4.wft</filename> -f <replaceable>wft</replaceable>
 | 
						|
            -a <replaceable>check</replaceable></command></para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>To record the database resulting from all imports, supply
 | 
						|
          <command>-o</command> flag (use <command>-f</command> if the
 | 
						|
          filename does not allow GRAMPS to guess the format):</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para><command>gramps -i <filename>file1.ged</filename> -i
 | 
						|
            <filename>file2.gpkg</filename> -o
 | 
						|
            <filename>~/new-package</filename> -f
 | 
						|
            <replaceable>gramps-pkg</replaceable></command></para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>To save any error messages of the above example into files
 | 
						|
          <filename>outfile</filename> and <filename>errfile</filename>,
 | 
						|
          run:</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para><command>gramps -i <filename>file1.ged</filename> -i
 | 
						|
            <filename>file2.dpkg</filename> -o
 | 
						|
            <filename>~/new-package</filename> -f
 | 
						|
            <replaceable>gramps-pkg</replaceable>
 | 
						|
            ><filename>outfile</filename> 2><filename>errfile</filename>
 | 
						|
            </command></para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>To import three databases and start interactive GRAMPS session
 | 
						|
          with the result:</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para><command>gramps -i <filename>file1.ged</filename> -i
 | 
						|
            <filename>file2.gpkg</filename> -i
 | 
						|
            <filename>~/db3.gramps</filename> </command></para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>To open a database and, based on that data, generate timeline
 | 
						|
          report in PDF format putting the output into the
 | 
						|
          <filename>my_timeline.pdf</filename> file:</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para><command>gramps -O <filename>file.grdb</filename> -a
 | 
						|
            <replaceable>report</replaceable> -p
 | 
						|
            <replaceable>name=timeline,off=pdf,of=my_timeline.pdf</replaceable>
 | 
						|
            </command></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            <tip>
 | 
						|
              <para>Use the <replaceable>name=timeline,show=all</replaceable>
 | 
						|
              to find out about all available options for the timeline report.
 | 
						|
              To find out details of a particular option, use
 | 
						|
              <replaceable>show=option_name</replaceable>, e.g.
 | 
						|
              <replaceable>name=timeline,show=off</replaceable> string.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
              <para>To learn about available report names, use
 | 
						|
              <replaceable>name=show</replaceable> string.</para>
 | 
						|
            </tip>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <varlistentry>
 | 
						|
          <term>Finally, to start normal interactive session type:</term>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          <listitem>
 | 
						|
            <para><command>gramps </command></para>
 | 
						|
          </listitem>
 | 
						|
        </varlistentry>
 | 
						|
      </variablelist>
 | 
						|
    </sect1>
 | 
						|
  </appendix>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <!-- ENTITY cmdplug SYSTEM "cmdplug.xml" -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <!-- ENTITY bugs SYSTEM "bugs.xml" -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  <appendix id="gramps-about">
 | 
						|
    <!-- $Id$ -->
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <title>About GRAMPS</title>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>GRAMPS was written by Donald N. Allingham
 | 
						|
    (<email>don@gramps-project.org</email>).</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>The somewhat incomplete list of contributors includes (in
 | 
						|
    alphabetical order): <itemizedlist>
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Larry Allingham</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Jens Arvidsson</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Marcos Bedinelli</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Douglas S. Blank</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Radu Bogdan Mare</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Alexander Bogdashevsky</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Richard Bos</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Nathan Bullock</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Lorenzo Cappelletti</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Pier Luigi Cinquantini</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Bruce J. DeGrasse</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Alexandre Duret-Lutz</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Billy C. Earney</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Baruch Even</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Bernd Felsche</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Egyeki Gergely</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Michel Guitel</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Steve Hall</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>David R. Hampton</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Martin Hawlisch</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Anton Huber</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Frode Jemtland</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Greg Kuperberg</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Arkadiusz Lipiec</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Lars Kr. Lundin</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Radek Malcic</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Leonid Mamtchenkov</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Tino Meinen</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Frederick Noronha</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Jeffrey C. Ollie</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Donald A. Peterson</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Guillaume Pratte</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Laurent Protois</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Matthieu Pupat</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Trevor Rhodes</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Alexander Roitman</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Jason Salaz</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Julio Sanchez</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Bernd Schandl</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Martin Senftleben</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Gary Shao</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Jim Smart</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Steve Swales</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Eero Tamminen</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Samuel Tardieu</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Richard Taylor</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>James Treacy</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Sebastian Voecking</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Xing Wang</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Tim Waugh</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        <listitem>
 | 
						|
          <para>Jesper Zedlitz</para>
 | 
						|
        </listitem>
 | 
						|
      </itemizedlist> If you know of somebody else who should be listed here,
 | 
						|
    please let us know.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>To find more information about GRAMPS, please visit the <ulink
 | 
						|
    type="http" url="http://gramps-project.org">GRAMPS Project Web
 | 
						|
    page</ulink>.</para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding this application or
 | 
						|
    this manual, use the help menu in GRAMPS, or follow the directions on
 | 
						|
    <ulink type="http" url="http://gramps.sourceforce.net/contact.html">this
 | 
						|
    site.</ulink></para>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    <para>This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General
 | 
						|
    Public license as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
 | 
						|
    version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of
 | 
						|
    this license can be found at this <ulink type="help"
 | 
						|
    url="ghelp:gpl">link</ulink>, or in the file COPYING included with the
 | 
						|
    source code of this program.</para>
 | 
						|
  </appendix>
 | 
						|
</book> |